MB5300 series Online Manual Read Me First Useful Functions Available on the Machine Overview of the Machine Printing Copying Scanning Faxing Troubleshooting English
Contents Read Me First. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 How to Use the Online Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Trademarks and Licenses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Search Tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Notes on Operation Explanations. . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 What is a Security code?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Printing with Google Cloud Print. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Preparations for Printing with Google Cloud Print. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Media Types You Can Use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Paper Load Limit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Media Types You Cannot Use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Printing Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning the Exterior of the Machine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Cleaning the Platen Glass and Document Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Cleaning the ADF (Auto Document Feeder). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing and Confirming Network Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 IJ Network Tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Changing the Settings in the Wireless LAN Sheet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Changing the WEP Detailed Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About Firewall. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 Tips for Ensuring Optimal Printing Quality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 Useful Information about Ink. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 Key Points to Successful Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stamp/Background Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 Registering a Stamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424 Setting Up Envelope Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Obtaining the Latest MP Drivers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521 Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522 Before Installing the MP Drivers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 Installing the MP Drivers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scanning Both Sides of Each Document at One Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591 Saving after Checking Scan Results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594 IJ Scan Utility Screens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597 IJ Scan Utility Main Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Useful Information on Scanning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 740 Adjusting Cropping Frames in the Image Stitch Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 741 Resolution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 742 Data Formats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Registering Recipients. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 826 Registering Recipients Using the Operation Panel of the Machine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 827 Registering the Fax/Telephone Number of Recipients. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 828 Registering Recipients in Group Dial. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sending Faxes from a Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 895 Sending a FAX (Fax Driver). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 896 Creating an Address Book (Fax Driver). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 899 Setup when Opening the Address Book for the First Time (Windows XP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Packets Are Sent Steadily. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 950 How to Restore the Machine's Network Settings to Factory Default. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 951 Problems with Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 952 Printing Does Not Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Position or Size of the Image Cannot be Detected Correctly When Scanning from the Operation Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 999 Item Is Placed Correctly, but the Scanned Image Is Slanted. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000 Scanned Image Is Enlarged (Reduced) on the Computer Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1001 Software Problems. . . . . . . . . . . .
2801. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1058 In Other Cases. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1060 1007. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1061 1008. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5040. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1101 5050. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1102 5051. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1103 5100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6921. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1135 6930. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1136 6931. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1137 6932. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Read Me First Notes on Online Manual Usage How to Print Notes on Online Manual Usage • Reproduction, diversion or copying of any text, photo or image published in the Online Manual (hereinafter referred to as "this guide"), in whole or in part, is prohibited. • In principle, Canon shall change or delete the contents of this guide without prior notice to customers. In addition, Canon may suspend or stop the disclosure of this guide due to unavoidable reasons.
How to Use the Online Manual Symbols Used in This Document Warning Instructions that, if ignored, could result in death or serious personal injury caused by incorrect operation of the equipment. These must be observed for safe operation. Caution Instructions that, if ignored, could result in personal injury or material damage caused by incorrect operation of the equipment. These must be observed for safe operation. Important Instructions including important information.
Trademarks and Licenses • Microsoft is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. • Windows is a trademark or registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries. • Windows Vista is a trademark or registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries. • Internet Explorer is a trademark or registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries.
1. Definitions. "License" shall mean the terms and conditions for use, reproduction, and distribution as defined by Sections 1 through 9 of this document. "Licensor" shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the copyright owner that is granting the License. "Legal Entity" shall mean the union of the acting entity and all other entities that control, are controlled by, or are under common control with that entity.
their Contribution(s) with the Work to which such Contribution(s) was submitted. If You institute patent litigation against any entity (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that the Work or a Contribution incorporated within the Work constitutes direct or contributory patent infringement, then any patent licenses granted to You under this License for that Work shall terminate as of the date such litigation is filed. 4. Redistribution.
goodwill, work stoppage, computer failure or malfunction, or any and all other commercial damages or losses), even if such Contributor has been advised of the possibility of such damages. 9. Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability. While redistributing the Work or Derivative Works thereof, You may choose to offer, and charge a fee for, acceptance of support, warranty, indemnity, or other liability obligations and/or rights consistent with this License.
Enter keywords in the search window and click (Search). You can search for target pages in this guide. Search Tips You can search for target pages by entering keywords in the search window. Note • The displayed screen may vary. • When searching from this page or the "Home" page without entering your product's model name or your application's name, all products supported by this guide will be considered for the search.
Note • The displayed screen varies depending on your product. • Searching for Application Functions Enter your application's name and a keyword for the function you want to learn about Example: When you want to learn how to print collages with My Image Garden Enter "My Image Garden collage" in the search window and perform a search • Searching for Reference Pages Enter your model name and a reference page title* * You can find reference pages more easily by entering the function name as well.
Notes on Operation Explanations In this guide, most of the operations are described based on the windows displayed when Windows 8.1 operating system (called Windows 8.1 below) or Windows 8 operating system (called Windows 8 below) is used.
Useful Functions Available on the Machine Connect Wirelessly with Ease in "Access Point Mode" Download a Variety of Content Materials Print Items with Easy-PhotoPrint+ (Web Application) Print Photos on Facebook Easily Using a Facebook App "Print Your Days" Use the Machine More Conveniently with Quick Toolbox Connection Methods Available on the Machine Notice for Web Service Printing Use MAXIFY Cloud Link Printing with Google Cloud Print Printing from AirPrint Compliant Device Checking Printer Information On
Connect Wirelessly with Ease in "Access Point Mode" The machine supports "access point mode" in which you can connect to the machine wirelessly from a computer or smartphone even in an environment without an access point or wireless LAN router. Switch to "access point mode" with simple steps to enjoy scanning and printing wirelessly. When you use the machine with the access point mode, be sure to specify the access point name of the machine and the security setting in advance.
Download a Variety of Content Materials CREATIVE PARK A "printing materials site" where you can download all the printing materials for free. Various types of content such as seasonal cards and paper crafts that can be made by assembling paper parts are provided. CREATIVE PARK PREMIUM A service where customers using models that support PREMIUM Contents can download exclusive printing materials. PREMIUM Contents can be downloaded easily via Easy-PhotoPrint+.
Print Items with Easy-PhotoPrint+ (Web Application) You can easily create and print personalized items such as calendars and collages, anytime and anywhere, by simply accessing Easy-PhotoPrint+ on the web from a computer or tablet. By using Easy-PhotoPrint+, you can create items in the latest environment without going through the trouble of installation. Moreover, you can use various photos for your item through integration with social networks such as Facebook, or with online storage, web albums, etc.
Print Photos on Facebook Easily Using a Facebook App "Print Your Days" Use Print Your Days to collect Facebook photos of memories of parties and travel, recent activity of your family and friends, your hobbies, etc., then create and print a work of art. Print Your Days is available from the Print Your Days Facebook page.
Use the Machine More Conveniently with Quick Toolbox Quick Toolbox is a shortcut menu that lets you access the functions you want to use with one click. After installing utilities compatible with Quick Toolbox, they will be added to this menu. The Quick Toolbox provides a convenient way to quickly launch added utilities for making machine settings and doing other management tasks. Refer to "Quick Toolbox Guide" for details.
Connection Methods Available on the Machine The following connection methods are available on the machine. Wireless Connection With an access point Without an access point Wired Connection USB Connection Wireless Connection There are two methods for connecting the printer to your device (such as a smartphone). One method is to connect using an access point, and the other method is to connect without using an access point. The two connection methods cannot be used at the same time.
• When the connection between a device and an access point is completed and (Wi-Fi icon) is displayed in the device's screen, you can connect the device to the printer using the access point. Connection without Using an Access Point • Connect the printer and a device without using an access point. Connect a device and the printer directly using the printer's access point mode function. • When establishing a connection in access point mode, Internet connection may become unavailable.
Connection without Using an Access Point (Windows XP) Restrictions (Appears in a new window) 1. Press the HOME button (A) on the printer. 2. Tap the bottom left (B) of the screen. 3. Tap Access point mode active. 4. Check the SSID displayed in the printer screen. 5. Tap Details, check the Password (network key), then tap OK. You will use the SSID and Password (network key) in the subsequent steps.
6. Tap OK. 7. Right-click the Wireless Network Connection icon in the notification area of the taskbar on the computer, then select View Available Wireless Networks. 8. Select the network name (SSID) you want to use, then click Connect. 9. Enter the Password (Network key), then click Connect.
10. When connection is complete, click Back until the screen below appears. Proceed with the setup.
Restrictions When connecting another device while a device (such as a smartphone) is already connected to the printer, connect it using the same connection method as the connected device. If you connect using a different connection method, the connection to the device in use will be disabled. Connection Using a Wired Network cannot be performed on printers that do not support a wired connection.
• When connecting a device and the printer in access point mode, Internet connection may become unavailable. In that case, web services for the printer cannot be used. • In access point mode, you can connect up to five devices at the same time. If you try to connect a sixth device while five devices are already connected, an error will appear. If an error appears, disconnect a device that does not use the printer, then configure settings again.
Notice for Web Service Printing When Using Web Service • Canon does not guarantee the continuity and reliability of the web services provided, the availability of site access, or permission to download the materials. • Canon may at any time update, change, or delete the information provided through the web service, or may suspend or discontinue the service without prior notice. Canon shall not be held responsible for any damages resulting from such actions.
When printing downloaded template forms: 1. The copyright of each material (photos, illustrations, logos, or documents: hereinafter referred to as "the materials") provided on the web template printing service belongs to their respective owners. Issues pertaining to Rights of Publicity may arise regarding the use of any of people or characters displayed on the web template printing service.
Use MAXIFY Cloud Link By using MAXIFY Cloud Link, you can connect your printer to a cloud service, such as CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, Evernote, or Twitter, and use the following functions without using a computer: • • • • Print images from a photo-sharing service Print documents from a data management service Save scanned images to a data management service. Use Twitter to report the printer status, such as no paper or low ink levels.
Using MAXIFY Cloud Link from Your Printer Before Using MAXIFY Cloud Link from Your Printer Preparing to Use MAXIFY Cloud Link from Your Printer Using MAXIFY Cloud Link Cloud Troubleshooting 44
Before Using MAXIFY Cloud Link from Your Printer First, check the following content: • Precautions If you plan to use the web service to print documents, be sure to check these precautions beforehand. • Network environment The printer must be connected to a LAN and to the Internet. If your printer is not connected to a LAN, see here and set one up. For information on the LAN and Internet settings, see the manual of your network devices or contact the manufacturer.
Preparing to Use MAXIFY Cloud Link from Your Printer Follow the steps described below to register the printer information to the cloud service server. 1. Check that the printer is connected to the Internet 2. From the printer home screen, select Cloud 3. When the registration completed screen appears, select OK 4.
Note • If you select Disagree, a confirmation screen of canceling the user information registration appears. If you select Yes, the user information registration is canceled, and you return to the Home screen. Even if you select Disagree, you can still use this service by selecting Agree from the registration screen later. • You can print the displayed information by pressing the Start button. 6. On the Time zone screen, select the time closest to your region, and then select Next 7.
The registration of printer information is completed, and a list of apps is displayed. See here for the description of the apps list screen. After you complete the registration, you can print photos and documents that have been uploaded to apps on the linked cloud service and add/delete/sort apps.
Application Management Only the Administrator of the printer can use this service. This section explains how to add, delete, and sort apps. Add apps You can add your favorite apps to the printer. Follow the steps described below to add apps. 1. From the printer home screen, select Cloud 2. On the cloud's Main screen, select Add/delete 3. Select Register apps 4. From the list, select the category of the app 5.
Note • Description of displayed icons : Can be used with genuine Canon ink. 6. Select Register The registration is completed and the app is added to the apps list. To register another app, repeat the procedure from step 5. To end the app registration, select Back and return to the cloud's Main screen. Important • Some apps may require a linked app account before you can use the app. If this is the case, set up an account beforehand. Delete apps You can delete unnecessary apps from the apps list.
3. Select Delete registered apps 4. From the apps list, select the app that you want to delete Note • Description of displayed icons : Cannot be used because it is not yet released, not available in your region, or does not support your model. : Can be used with genuine Canon ink. 5. Select Delete When the deletion is finished, the app will be deleted from the apps list on the main screen. To delete another app, repeat the procedure from step 4.
2. On the cloud's Main screen, select Add/delete 3. Select Sort 4. On the apps list, select the app that you want to sort Note • Description of displayed icons : Cannot be used because it is not yet released, not available in your region, or does not support your model. : Can be used with genuine Canon ink. 5. Use / buttons to move the app 6.
Sorting is complete. To continue the sorting, repeat the procedure from step 4. To end the sorting, select Back and return to the cloud's Main screen.
Using MAXIFY Cloud Link This section introduces the photo printing procedure by using CANON iMAGE GATEWAY as an example. Important • • • • The available functions differ depending on the app. The printing procedure differs depending on the app. You need to get the account and register photo and other data beforehand. The following file formats can be printed: jpg, jpeg, pdf, docx, doc, xlsx, xls, pptx, ppt, and rtf. The file formats that can be printed differ depending on the app.
4. In the displayed image list, select the image that you want to print, and then select Next 5. Make the necessary print settings, and then select Color A message that indicates the completion of issuing print job appears, and printing starts. To continue printing, select Continue, and perform the operation from Step 3. To end the printing, select Apps. The screen returns to the apps list screen.
Note • To leave a usage history of this service, from the Home window on the operation panel, select Setup -> Web service setup -> Web service connection setup -> IJ Cloud Printing Center setup -> History setting for this service -> Save.
Cloud Windows This section describes the Main screen of Cloud and the services available on the Main screen. When using the Cloud function, follow the steps described below first and display the Main screen. Important • With this service, the functions available to Standard user of the printer are different from those available to the printer Administrator. Standard user can only use the functions marked by an asterisk (*).
Note • Description of displayed icons : Cannot be used because it is not yet released, not available in your region, or does not support your model. : Can be used with genuine Canon ink. (2) Add/delete button Use this button to add, delete, and sort apps. Register apps Select this to add your favorite apps. See here for details on how to add apps Delete apps Select this to delete registered apps. See here for details on how to delete apps Sort Select this to sort the apps list.
Manage jobs* From the Status list window, you can check the status of a job. Settings* Select this to set the Time zone. Select your region on the list. For some regions, you can set whether or not to apply the daylight saving time setting. Important • If you cannot find your region on the list, select the one closest to your region. Legal information* This shows the License agreement and Privacy statement. Press the Start button to print the displayed information.
Cloud Troubleshooting If you cannot print Check the following if you cannot print. • Check that the printer is connected to the Internet. • Check that the printer is connected to a LAN and the LAN environment is connected to the Internet. • Check that no error message is displayed on the printer's LCD monitor. If the problem is not resolved, use the printer driver from your computer to perform the print job and check whether the data can be printed normally on the printer.
Using MAXIFY Cloud Link from Your Smartphone, Tablet, or Computer Before Using Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center Preparations Before Using Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center Using Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center Adding a Printer Adding a MAXIFY Cloud Link User Troubleshooting Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center 61
Before Using Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center is a service that links with the cloud function of the printer and allows you to perform operations such as registering and managing apps from your smartphone or tablet device, and checking the print status, print error, and ink status of the printer. You can also print app photos and documents from your smartphone or tablet.
Requirements for Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center operation Computer CPU x86 or x64 1.
• In an in-house network environment, the 5222 port must be released. For confirmation instructions, contact the network administrator.
Preparations Before Using Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center To use the Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center, you need to follow the steps described below and register the user information. Print registration information from the printer 1. From the home window, select Setup -> Web service setup -> Web service connection setup -> IJ Cloud Printing Center setup -> Register with this service 2. In the registration confirmation window, Select Yes 3. In the print settings, select the display language 4.
Note • You will use this printed page in the next step. Important • The operation to complete the registration should be done within 60 minutes. Access the URL on the printed page, and then enter the e-mail address and other necessary information Important • Do not use the Back button of the web browser while an operation is processing. The screen may not transition properly. 1.
2. On the Login screen, select Create new account 3. Enter the E-mail address and Printer registration ID of the printer's owner, and then select OK The registration page URL is sent to the e-mail address entered.
Important • There are character restrictions for the e-mail address, as shown below. • You can use up to 255 alphanumeric characters consisting of single-byte characters and symbols (!#$%&'*+/=?^_{}|~.-@). • Multibyte characters cannot be used. You will get an error if the e-mail address you enter contains a character that cannot be used.
3. In the user information entry screen, enter your Password, and select Next Enter your password for logging in to the Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center.
Important • There are character restrictions for the Password, as shown below. • The password needs to be between 8 and 32 characters long, using single-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols (!"#$%&'()*+,-./:;<=>?@[\]^_`{|}~). (Alphabets are case-sensitive) 4. Enter the User name Enter the name that identifies the user.
• The password needs to be between 1 and 20 characters long, using single-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols (!"#$%&'()*+,-./:;<=>?@[\]^_`{|}~). (Alphabets are case-sensitive) 5. Specify the Time zone setting, and select Next Select your region on the list. If you cannot find your region on the list, select the one closest to your region. Apply daylight saving time This appears only when there is a daylight saving time in the Time zone that you selected.
Important • The Security code entry field has the following character restrictions: • Single-byte numbers The registration is complete. A registration completion message is displayed. When you select the OK button in the message, the login screen is displayed. Enter the registered e-mail address and password, and log in to the Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center.
Printing Your Printer registration ID To add a printer by using Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center, you will need a Printer registration ID. From the operation panel of this printer, print the URL of the authentication site and your Printer registration ID. The procedure is as follows: 1. Check that the printer is connected to the Internet Important • To use this function, you must connect this printer to the Internet. 2.
Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center window This section describes the Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center screens that are displayed on your smartphone, tablet device, or computer. Description of the Login screen Description of the Main screen Description of the Login screen This section provides the description of the Login screen of Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center. Important • You have 5 tries to enter your password. If you fail, you will not be able to log in for about the next hour.
Create new account A new registration will be added to the Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center. For a new registration, you need the Printer registration ID. System requirements This displays the system requirements for the Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center. Help/legal notices (smartphone and tablet devices only) The description of the Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center screen and various reminders are displayed.
If you are using a smartphone or tablet (1) Left context menu (2) Printer name area (3) Right context menu (4) Display area (5) Menu area (1) Left context menu When you select , the Mng. printer screen of the Manage users screen appears. For general users, the Select printer screen appears. Mng.
From the Mng. printer screen (Select printer screen), you can check*and update* printer information registered to the Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center, change printer names, delete printers, add printers, and copy apps. • Check the printer information* The registered printer name is displayed. indicates the currently selected printer. indicates that an error occurred on the printer.
• Change the printer name When you select , a screen to change the printer name appears. Follow the instructions on the screen to change the name. Note • The printer name entry has the following character limitation: • Up to 128 characters • Delete printers , the printer is deleted from the Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center. When you select When transferring the ownership of the printer, select Clear the information saved on the printer.
• User deletion Select the check box of the user to be deleted, and select Delete. However, you cannot delete yourself. To delete yourself, cancel your membership from the user information screen. • Adding a user Select Add user. The user registration screen appears. • Changing Administrator and Standard user settings You can change the privileges of the Administrator and Standard users. (2) Printer name area The registered name of the printer selected is displayed.
• Latest notices* This displays the latest notices. The • symbol indicates that there is a new unread notice. User information* This displays the User information screen. You can change the registered e-mail address, password, language, time zone, and other settings. • Help/legal notices* The description of the Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center screen and various reminders are displayed. Log out* • This opens the Log out screen of the Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center.
(5) Menu area The following 4 menu buttons are displayed: • Apps* This displays the list of registered apps in the Display area. • Config This displays the Register apps screen in the Display area. The display can be toggled between Registered and Search apps. The Registered screen lists registered apps. You can check the information of these apps or deregister them.
On the Search apps screen, the apps that you can register by using the Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center are displayed by category. ◦ When you select When you select , the details of the app are displayed. / , you can choose to register or unregister the app.
not support your model. : Can be used with genuine Canon ink. • Properties* This screen displays the status of the printer that is currently selected. You can check how much ink is remaining or details about an error that occurred. You can also access the ink purchasing site and the Online Manual. Important • The Properties displayed may differ from the actual status at the display time, depending on the printer status. • Manage jobs* This screen displays the print status and the print history.
(5) Notices area (6) Information area (7) Global navigation area (8) Display area (1) Mng. printer (Select printer) button When you select the Mng. printer (Select printer) button, the Mng. printer (Select printer) screen appears. From the Mng. printer screen (Select printer screen), you can check*and update* printer information registered to the Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center, change printer names, delete printers, add printers, and copy apps.
• Display update date/time of the printer information* This displays the date and time the printer information was last updated. refreshes the information. • Multiuser mode If multiple users are using the printer, select the Multiuser mode check box. • Change the printer name When you select , a screen to change the printer name appears. Follow the instructions on the screen to change the name.
Set the Destination printer and the Source printer. Then select OK. (2) Manage users button When you select the Manage users button, the Manage users screen appears. From the Manage users screen, you can check user information registered to the Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center, delete users, add users, and change the Administrator and Standard user settings. • User deletion Select the check box of the user to be deleted, and select Delete. However, you cannot delete yourself.
• Sort (Apps) This displays the list of registered apps in the Display area. Drag the app to change the order. When you finish sorting, press the Set sort order button and confirm the order. • Config This displays the Register apps screen in the Display area. The display can be toggled between Registered and Search apps. The Registered screen lists registered apps. You can check the information of these apps or deregister them.
◦ When you select , the details of the app are displayed. When you select / , you can choose to register or unregister the app. Note • Description of displayed icons : Cannot be used because it is not yet released, not available in your region, or does not support your model. : Can be used with genuine Canon ink. • Properties* This screen displays the status of the printer that is currently selected. You can check how much ink is remaining or details about an error that occurred.
(5) Notices area This displays the latest notice. Nothing is displayed in this area if there is no notice. When you select Notice list, you can display up to 40 items. (6) Information area This display other information, including the privacy statement and other companies' licensing information. (7) Global navigation area The User information*, Instructions*, and Log out* buttons are displayed. Press the User information to change the settings.
Using Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center When the user registration is completed, you can log in to the Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center and use the service. 1. From your PC, smartphone, or tablet, access the service login URL (http://cs.c-ij.com/) 2. On the Login screen, enter the E-mail address and Password, and then select Log in Important • The e-mail address and password are case-sensitive. Make sure the case is correct.
Important • • • • The available functions differ depending on the app. The printing procedure differs depending on the app. You need to get the account and register photo and other data beforehand. The following file formats can be printed: jpg, jpeg, pdf, docx, doc, xlsx, xls, pptx, ppt, and rtf. The file formats that can be printed differ depending on the app. • Before you print, check that printer is on and is connected to the network. Then start.
4. In the displayed image list, select the image that you want to print, and then select Next 5.
6. A print job completion message appears, and printing starts To continue printing, select Continue, and perform the operation from Step 3. To end the printing, select Apps. The screen returns to the apps list screen. Important • If a print job is not printed within 24 hours after the print job is issued, the print job will expire and cannot be printed. • With premium apps that limit the number of print jobs, print jobs that expire and cannot be printed are also included in the print count.
Adding a Printer With one account, you can use the Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center services on multiple printers. The procedure for adding a printer is as follows: 1. Print the registration information from the printer to be added 2. From the browser on your smartphone, tablet, or computer, access the authentication site URL 3. Select Add printer 4. When the confirmation message is displayed, select OK 5.
Note • When you access the service from Remote UI, the Printer registration ID is entered automatically. 6. Enter the Password for the account you obtained beforehand, and select OK Printer addition is completed. If a printer added message is not displayed, follow the instructions on the displayed screen.
Adding a MAXIFY Cloud Link User Several people can use one printer. This section describes the user addition procedure and the user privileges. Adding a user 1. On the service screen, select Manage users 2. Select Add user Note • When you select Add user, the service first checks whether the maximum number of users has been reached. If new users can be added, the user registration screen appears. • The maximum number of users that can be added for 1 printer is 20.
3. Enter the e-mail address of the user to be added, and then select OK The URL for completing the registration is then sent to the entered e-mail address. 4. Access the URL reported in the e-mail 5. Read the terms displayed in the License agreement and Privacy statement screens. If you agree to the terms, select Agree. 6.
Enter your password for logging in to the Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center. Important • There are character restrictions for the password, as shown below. • The password needs to be between 8 and 32 characters long, using single-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols (!"#$%&'()*+,-./:;<=>?@[\]^_`{|}~). (Alphabets are case-sensitive) 7. Enter the User Name Enter the name that identifies the user.
• The password needs to be between 1 and 20 characters long, using single-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols (!"#$%&'()*+,-./:;<=>?@[\]^_`{|}~). (Alphabets are case-sensitive) 8. Set Time zone and select Next Select your region on the list. If you cannot find your region on the list, select the one closest to your region. Apply daylight saving time This appears only when there is a daylight saving time in the time zone that you selected. Select whether or not to apply the daylight saving time. 9.
Important • The Security code entry field has the following character restrictions: • Single-byte numbers The main registration is complete, and a registration completion e-mail is sent. Note • A cookie for the selected user is added to the printer, and the login status of each user is recovered. Cookies for up to 8 users can be registered to 1 printer. Printer user privileges If several users are using the cloud service for 1 printer, each user is categorized as the Administrator or a Standard user.
Troubleshooting Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center If an app cannot be installed If the registered app is not in the Apps list If the information is not updated when you press the Update button If you do not receive the registration e-mail Printing starts on its own even if you do not do anything If you are unable to log in correctly even after entering the correct password in iOS or Mac If an app cannot be installed Check the country or region where the printer was purchased.
If you are unable to log in correctly even after entering the correct password in iOS or Mac If you are using iOS or Mac, and the password contains the ¥ symbol, enter a backslash instead. For instructions on entering a backslash, see the OS help.
What is a Security code? A Security code identifies the user when multiple other users are sharing the same printer. Important • If you do not set a Security code, another user may use your account. • This code is valid only when you use MAXIFY Cloud Link from the printer operation panel. You cannot use this code when you access the Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center from your smartphone, tablet, or computer.
Printing with Google Cloud Print The printer is compatible with Google Cloud Print™ (Google Cloud Print is a service provided by Google Inc.). By using Google Cloud Print, you can print from anywhere with applications or services supporting Google Cloud Print. 1. Preparations for Printing with Google Cloud Print 2.
Preparations for Printing with Google Cloud Print To print with Google Cloud Print, you need to get Google account and register the printer with Google Cloud Print in advance. Getting Google Account If you already have Google account, register the printer. Registering the Printer with Google Cloud Print Getting Google Account First, get your Google account in order to register the printer with Google Cloud Print.
2. From the Home screen, select Setup 3. Select Web service setup -> Connection setup -> Google Cloud Print setup -> Register with Google Cloud Print Note • If you have already registered the printer with Google Cloud Print, the confirmation message to re-register the printer is displayed. 4. When the confirmation screen to register the printer is displayed, select Yes 5.
3. Select Web service setup -> Connection setup -> Google Cloud Print setup -> Delete from Google Cloud Print 4.
Printing from Computer or Smartphone with Google Cloud Print When you send print data with Google Cloud Print, the printer receives the print data and prints it automatically if the printer is turned on. When printing from a smartphone, tablet, computer, or other external device by using Google Cloud Print, load paper into the printer in advance. Sending the Print Data with Google Cloud Print 1.
the supported paper sizes, go to the Online Manual home page, and refer to the "Cannot Print Properly with Automatic Duplex Printing" for your model.) • If you select plain paper as media type or if you select B5/A5-size as paper size, the print data is printed with border even when you select the borderless print setting. • The print results may differ from the print image depending on the print data.
Printing from AirPrint Compliant Device This document explains how to use AirPrint to print wirelessly from your iPad, iPhone and iPod touch to a Canon printer. AirPrint enables you to print photos, email, Web pages and documents from your Apple device directly to your printer without installing a driver. Checking Your Environment First, check your environment.
3. From the menu options, tap Print. 4. From Printer Options, select the model that you are using. Important • Because some app does not support AirPrint, Printer Options may not be displayed. If an app does not let you use printer options, you cannot print from that app. Note • The Printer Options differ depending on the app and model you are using.
5. When printing a file type that has multiple pages, such as a PDF file, click Range and then click All Pages or select the range of pages to be printed. 6. For 1 Copy, click + or - to set the number of required copies. 7. For Duplex Printing, click On to enable duplex printing or click Off to disable the function. 8. Tap the Print. When you execute printing, the printer prints according to the specified settings.
Deleting a Print Job To delete a print job with AirPrint, use one of the following two methods: • From the printer: If your printer has a LCD monitor, use the operation panel to cancel the print job. If you printer does not have a LCD monitor, press the Stop button on the printer to cancel the print job. • From an Apple device: Press the Home button on the Apple device twice to set the Multitasking mode, and then swipe to the right. Tap the Print Center icon to display a Print Summary.
Note • After you turn on the printer, it may take few minutes before the printer can communicate through a wireless LAN connection. Confirm that the printer is connected to the wireless LAN, and then try printing. • If Bonjour on the printer is disabled, AirPrint cannot be used. Check the LAN settings on the printer, and enable Bonjour. Note • The windows used in the explanations may differ from those displayed by your Apple product or app.
Checking Printer Information You can use your smartphone, tablet, or computer to check the Printer status and execute utility functions from apps such as Canon Inkjet Print Utility and MAXIFY Printing Solutions. You can also use the convenient web services presented by Canon. 1. Selecting Printer Information in an Apps Screen Note • You can also enter IPv4 address directly in the web browser to display printer information. Setup -> Device settings -> LAN settings -> 1.
Printer status This function displays printer information such as the remaining ink amount, the status, and detailed error information. You can also connect to the ink purchase site or support page, and use Web Services. Utilities This function allows you to set and execute the printer utility functions such as cleaning. AirPrint settings This function allows you to specify the Apple AirPrint settings, such as position information.
Manual (Online) This function displays the Online Manual.
Online Storage Integration Function The printer can integrate with online storage services such as Evernote. Integration with Online Notetaking Service "Evernote" If an Evernote client application is installed on your computer, you can import scanned images into the application and upload them to the Evernote server. The uploaded images can be browsed from other computers, smartphones, etc. To use Evernote, you need to create an account. See the "CREATE ACCOUNT" page of Evernote for account creation.
How to Use Print from E-mail By using Print from E-mail, you can easily print a photo or document saved on your smartphone, tablet, or computer just by attaching it to an e-mail. You can print simply from outside like a travel destination. Also, your family or friends can print by registering beforehand. You can use Print from E-mail on any Canon printer that supports the service. Checking Your Environment First, check your environment.
4. Access the URL provided in the e-mail and complete the printer registration process Note • The e-mail address that appears on the screen when you have finished registering is the e-mail address that will be used just for the Print from E-mail function. For details about the registration procedure, see here Printing from Your Smartphone, Tablet, or Computer 1. Prepare a file that you want to print The file format, number of files, and file size that this printing function supports are provided below.
Use the Service With More Than One Person To allow multiple users to use this function, register users (other than the printer's owner) as members. 1. The printer's owner uses his/her smartphone, tablet, or computer to access the service's login URL (https://pr.mp.c-ij.com/po) and logs in 2. Select the printer name that you want to add the member.
If you want to check the error details, the printer owner have to access the login URL (https://pr.mp.cij.com/po). Note • For a wireless LAN connection, after the printer is turned on, it may take a few minutes before communication becomes possible. Confirm that your printer is connected to the wireless LAN, and then try printing.
Preparing to Use Print from E-mail To use this service to print a photo or document, you need to follow the procedure provided below and register the printer. Print the Printer Registration Page's URL and the PIN Code First, print the printer registration page's URL and the PIN code. Check that there is sufficient amount of ink in the printer, and then print using the printer's operation panel. 1.
Important • An e-mail is sent with the required information for completing the registration to the e-mail address entered for the printer's owner. • If domain-specific reception is set, change the setting so that mail can be received from "info@mp.c-ij.com" Note • The e-mail address of the printer owner cannot be changed once the printer owner is registered. To change the e-mail address, delete the registration of the registered printer, and re-register the printer owner by using the new e-mail address.
Important • The maximum number of characters that can be entered is 30. 6. In the Confirm Owner Registration window, check the registration information, and select Register A temporary password will be displayed. Important • The temporary password that appears is not included in the notification e-mail. Be sure to write down the temporary password before closing the screen.
Timezone List (UTC-12:00) International Date Line West (UTC-11:00) Midway Island (UTC-10:00) Hawaii (UTC-09:00) Alaska (UTC-08:00) Tijuana, Baja California, Pacific Time (US & Canada) (UTC-07:00) Arizona, Chihuahua, La Paz, Mazatlan, Mountain Time (US & Canada) (UTC-06:00) Guadalajara, Mexico City, Monterrey, Saskatchewan, Central America, Central Time (US & Canada) (UTC-05:00) Indiana (East), Bogota, Lima, Quito, Eastern Time (US & Canada), Caracas (UTC-04:00) Asuncion, Santiago, Georgetown, La Paz, San Ju
Print Easily from a Smartphone or Tablet with MAXIFY Printing Solutions Use MAXIFY Printing Solutions to easily print photos saved on a smartphone or tablet wirelessly. You can also receive scanned data (PDF or JPEG) directly on a smartphone or tablet without using a computer. MAXIFY Printing Solutions can be downloaded from App Store and Google Play.
Printing with Windows RT When you use Windows RT, printing is easy because you simply connect this printer to the network. For information about connecting to the network, see the setup URL (http://www.canon.com/ijsetup) for using this product from your computer, smartphone, or tablet device. When the connection is complete, the Canon Inkjet Print Utility software, which allows you to specify detailed print settings, is downloaded automatically.
Overview of the Machine Safety Guide Safety Precautions Regulatory and Safety Information Main Components and Basic Operations Main Components About the Power Supply of the Machine Using the Operation Panel Entering Numbers, Letters, and Symbols Loading Paper / Originals Loading Paper Loading Originals Inserting the USB Flash Drive Replacing an Ink Tank Replacing an Ink Tank Checking the Ink Status from Your Computer Checking the Ink Status Maintenance When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect
Safety Guide Safety Precautions Regulatory and Safety Information 131
Safety Precautions Choosing a location • Do not install the machine in a location that is unstable or subject to excessive vibration. • Do not install the machine in locations that are very humid or dusty, in direct sunlight, outdoors, or close to a heating source. To avoid the risk of fire or electric shocks, use the machine under the operating environment specified in the On-screen Manual. • Do not place the machine on a thick rug or carpet.
Regulatory and Safety Information For models containing lithium battery • Dispose of used batteries according to the local regulations. • Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS When using your telephone equipment, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire, electric shock and injury to persons, including the following: 1.
does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: • Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. • Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. • Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. • Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details. Connection to party lines is subjected to state tariffs.
operated keeping the radiator at least 20cm or more away from person's body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles). Pre-Installation Requirements Notice This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface.
Telepermitted equipment only may be connected to the auxiliary telephone port. The auxiliary telephone port is not specifically designed for 3-wire connected equipment that may not respond to incoming ringing when attached to this port.
India only. This product is not to be disposed of with your household waste, according to the e-waste (Management and Handling) Rules, 2011. This product should be handed over to a designated collection point, e.g., to an authorized collection site for recycling waste electrical and electronic equipment (EEE). Improper handling of this type of waste could have a possible negative impact on the environment and human health due to potentially hazardous substances that are generally associated with EEE.
Main Components and Basic Operations Main Components About the Power Supply of the Machine Using the Operation Panel Entering Numbers, Letters, and Symbols 140
Main Components Front View Rear View Inside View Operation Panel 141
Front View (1) operation panel Use to change the settings of the machine or to operate it. Operation Panel (2) ADF (Auto Document Feeder) Load a document here. The documents loaded in the document tray are scanned automatically one sheet at a time. Loading Documents in the ADF (Auto Document Feeder) (3) document feeder cover Open when clearing jammed documents. (4) document guides Adjust these guides to match the width of document in the ADF. (5) document tray Open to load a document in the ADF.
(12) USB flash drive port Insert a USB flash drive to this port. Warning • Do not connect any equipment other than the USB flash drives to the USB flash drive port of the machine. This may cause fire, electric shock, or damage to the machine. Important • Do not touch the metal casing. • Do not use the USB cable longer than 10 feet (3 meters) to connect to the machine since it may affect the operation of other peripheral devices.
Rear View (1) rear cover Open when removing jammed paper. (2) power cord connector Plug in the supplied power cord. (3) telephone line jack Connect the telephone line. (4) external device jack Connect an external device such as telephone or answering machine. (5) wired LAN connector Plug in the LAN cable to connect the machine to a LAN. (6) USB port Plug in the USB cable to connect the machine with a computer. Important • Do not touch the metal casing.
Inside View (1) ink tank eject lever Push up when removing an ink tank. (2) print head holder The print head is pre-installed. Note • For details on replacing an ink tank, see Replacing an Ink Tank.
Operation Panel * All lamps on the operation panel are shown lit in the figure below for explanatory purposes. (1) POWER lamp Lights after flashing when the power is turned on. (2) ON button Turns the power on or off. Before turning on the power, make sure that the document cover is closed. Turning the Machine On and Off (3) HOME button Used to display the HOME screen. Using the Operation Panel (4) touch screen Displays messages, menu items, and the operational status.
About the Power Supply of the Machine Confirming that the Power Is On Turning the Machine On and Off Notice for the Power Plug/Power Cord Notice for Unplugging the Power Cord 147
Confirming that the Power Is On The POWER lamp is lit when the machine is turned on. Even if the touch screen is off, if the POWER lamp is lit, the machine is on. Note • It takes about 10 seconds until you can operate the machine after you turn on its power. Wait until the HOME screen is displayed on the touch screen. • The touch screen display will turn off if the machine is not operated for about 5 minutes. To restore the display, touch the touch screen.
Turning the Machine On and Off Turning on the machine 1. Press the ON button to turn on the machine. The POWER lamp flashes and then remains lit. Confirming that the Power Is On Note • It takes about 10 seconds until you can operate the machine after you turn on its power. Wait until the HOME screen is displayed on the touch screen. • If the Alarm lamp lights up or flashes and an error message is displayed on the touch screen, see A Message Is Displayed.
Note • The machine cannot send or receive faxes when the power is turned off. • The power cannot be turned off while the machine is sending or receiving a fax, or when unsent faxes are stored in the machine's memory. • You can set the machine to automatically turn off at the specified day of week or time. For details on Power control - OFF settings, see below.
Notice for the Power Plug/Power Cord Check the power plug/power cord once a month to confirm that it does not have anything unusual described below. • • • • • The power plug/power cord is hot. The power plug/power cord is rusty. The power plug/power cord is bent. The power plug/power cord is worn. The power plug/power cord is split. Caution • If you find anything unusual with the power plug/power cord described above, unplug the power cord and call for service.
Notice for Unplugging the Power Cord To unplug the power cord, follow the procedure below. Important • When you unplug the power cord, press the ON button, then confirm that the POWER lamp is off. Unplugging the power cord before the POWER lamp is turned off may cause drying or clogging of the print head and print quality may be reduced. • If the power cord is unplugged, all documents stored in the machine's memory will be lost.
Using the Operation Panel The operation panel consists of the touch screen (A) and buttons (B). Touch the HOME screen on the touch screen with your finger tip to select menus for copying, scanning, and other functions. The HOME screen comprises three separate screens. A: touch screen B: Buttons on the operation panel Basic Operation of the touch screen Touch the touch screen lightly with your finger tip or move your finger to access various functions or settings.
Touch Touch lightly with your finger tip. To move forward (or go back) menus or photos continuously, keep touching the forward (or back) mark. Flick Flick your finger on the screen up, down, left, or right. Use to switch menus or move forward or backward through photos. Drag While lightly touching the screen, move your finger up, down, left, or right. Use to view lists of items or move sliders.
An Operation Example of the touch screen Example: The touch screen operations available on the copy standby screen Tap A to display the print settings menu. Drag the screen up or down, then tap the option you want to select. After the list is displayed, tap the setting to select. Tap B to display the screen for selecting the number of copies. Tap the numbers to specify the number of copies, then tap OK.
Tap C to display the preview screen. Drag the sidebar (D) up or down to enlarge or reduce the zoom % while viewing the preview image at left. Tapping or the magnification. (E) also changes the zoom. Hold your finger on After the copy magnification is selected, tap OK.
Entering Numbers, Letters, and Symbols The machine allows you to enter or edit characters by selecting them from an on-screen character list when entering information, such as unit name, a recipient's name for the directory, etc. Switching the Input Mode The machine has an alphabetic mode and number/symbol mode. To switch between them, tap at the bottom left. (A) To switch between lower and upper case modes in the alphabetic mode and the type of symbols in the number/symbol mode, tap (B).
Entering or Editing Numbers, Letters, and Symbols The input method is as follows. • To move the insertion position (cursor position) in the entry field (C) Tap or (D). • To delete an entered character Move the cursor under the character to delete, then tap Keep on touching (E). to continue deleting characters. • To insert a space (F). Tap After entry is complete, tap OK (G).
Loading Paper / Originals Loading Paper Loading Originals Inserting the USB Flash Drive 159
Loading Paper Paper Sources to Load Paper Loading Plain Paper / Photo Paper Loading Envelopes Media Types You Can Use Media Types You Cannot Use Printing Area 160
Paper Sources to Load Paper Page Sizes and Media Types compatible with the machine Paper can be loaded into two sources, the upper cassette 1 (A) and lower cassette 2 (B). In the upper cassette 1 (A), all sizes of paper compatible with this machine (plain paper, photo paper, envelopes, etc.) can be loaded. In the lower cassette 2 (B), A4, Letter, and Legal-sized plain paper can be loaded.
D: Lock position for stowing the cassette When not using this machine for long period of time or moving it, set it to the position D. The cassette will fit into the width of the machine. Paper cannot be loaded while in this position. E: Lock position for A4 or Letter-sized paper or smaller For A4 or Letter-sized paper or smaller, set it to the position E. The cassette sticks out of the machine, but you can cover it by pulling out the paper output tray. Set the cassette to this position for normal use.
Loading Plain Paper / Photo Paper You can load paper in the cassette 1 or cassette 2. * This section describes how to load paper in the cassette 1. The procedure to loading paper in cassette 2 is also the same. Important • If you cut plain paper into small size such as 4" x 6" (10 x 15 cm) or 5" x 7" (13 x 18 cm) to perform trial print, it can cause paper jams. Note • In the cassette 1, you can load all sizes of paper compatible with this machine (plain paper, photo paper, envelopes, etc.).
3. Slide the paper guide (A) in front and (B) on the right to open the guides. 4. Load the paper stack WITH THE PRINT SIDE FACING DOWN, and place it in the center of the cassette. Important • Always load paper in the portrait orientation (C). Loading paper in the landscape orientation (D) can cause paper jams. Note • If paper has print side (front or back), such as photo paper, load it with the whiter side (or glossy side) facing down.
If the paper stack is in contact with the protrusion (E), the paper may not be fed properly. • To load 5" x 7" (13 x 18 cm) size paper or smaller, raise the tab (F) of the paper guide. (5" x 7" (13 x 18 cm) size paper or smaller can be loaded in the cassette 1 only.) • To load paper larger than A4 size in the cassette, press down the lock (G) on the cassette, then extend the cassette all the way out. 5. Align the paper guide (A) in front with the paper stack.
Note • Do not load sheets of paper higher than the load limit mark (H). • Keep the paper stack height below the tabs (I) of the paper guides. 7. Insert the cassette into the machine. Push the cassette into the machine until it stops. After inserting the cassette into the machine, the paper information registration screen for the cassette is displayed on the touch screen.
8. Select the size and type of the loaded paper in the cassette at Page size and Type, then tap Register. If a message is displayed on the screen, follow the directions in the message to complete registration. Paper setting for Printing 9. Extend the output tray extension (J), then open the paper output support (K). Note • When printing, select the size and type of the loaded paper on the print settings screen of the operation panel or printer driver.
Loading Envelopes You can load envelopes in the cassette 1. The address is automatically rotated and printed according to the envelope's direction by specifying with the printer driver properly. Important • Printing of envelopes from the operation panel is not supported. • Do not use the following envelopes. They could jam in the machine or cause the machine to malfunction.
3. Slide the paper guide (A) in front and (B) on the right to open the guides. 4. Load the envelopes WITH THE PRINT SIDE FACING DOWN, and place them in the center of the cassette 1. The folded flap of the envelope will be faced up as shown in the figure below (C). C: Rear side D: Address side Up to 10 envelopes can be loaded at once. Note • Align the envelope stack with the edge of the cassette 1 as shown in the figure below.
If the envelopes are in contact with the protrusion (E), the envelopes may not be fed properly. 5. Align the paper guide (A) in front with the envelopes. 6. Slide the paper guide (B) on the right to align the right and left guides with both sides of the envelopes. Do not slide the paper guides too hard against the envelopes. The envelopes may not be fed properly. Note • Do not load envelopes higher than the load limit mark (F). • Keep the envelope stack height below the tabs (G) of the paper guides. 7.
8. Select the size and type of the loaded envelopes in the cassette at Page size and Type, then tap Register. Paper setting for Printing 9. Extend the output tray extension (H), then open the paper output support (I). Note • When printing, select the size and type of the loaded envelopes on the print settings screen of the printer driver.
Media Types You Can Use To get the best printing result, choose paper suitable for printing. Canon provides various types of paper suitable for documents as well as paper suitable for photos or illustrations. We recommend the use of Canon genuine paper for printing your important photos. Media Types Commercially available papers • Plain Paper (including recycled paper) • Envelopes*1 Canon genuine papers The Model Number of Canon genuine paper is shown in brackets.
Standard sizes: • • • • • • • • • • Letter Legal A5 A4 B5 4" x 6" (10 x 15 cm) 5" x 7" (13 x 18 cm) 8" x 10" (20 x 25 cm) Envelope DL Envelope Com 10 Non-standard sizes: You can print on non-standard size paper within the following ranges. • cassette 1 - Minimum size: 3.50 x 5.00 inches (89.0 x 127.0 mm) - Maximum size: 8.50 x 14.00 inches (215.9 x 355.6 mm) • cassette 2 - Minimum size: 8.27 x 11.00 inches (210.0 x 279.4 mm) - Maximum size: 8.50 x 14.00 inches (215.9 x 355.
Paper Load Limit Commercially Available Papers Media Name Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Paper Output Tray Plain Paper (including recycled paper)*1 Approx. 250 sheets Approx. 250 sheets Approx. 75 sheets Envelopes 10 envelopes N/A*2 *3 Canon Genuine Papers Note • Feeding the following papers from the cassette 2 can damage the machine. Always load in the cassette 1.
*4 When loading paper in stacks, the print side may become marked as it is fed or paper may not feed properly. In this case, load one sheet at a time.
Media Types You Cannot Use Do not use the following types of paper. Using such paper will cause not only unsatisfactory results, but also the machine to jam or malfunction.
Printing Area Printing Area Other Sizes than Letter, Legal, Envelopes Letter, Legal Envelopes 177
Printing Area To ensure the best print quality, the machine allows a margin along each edge of media. The actual printable area will be the area inside these margins. Recommended printing area : Canon recommends that you print within this area. Printable area : The area where it is possible to print. However, printing in this area can affect the print quality or the paper feed precision. Note • With performing Automatic Duplex Printing and Duplex (Two-sided) Copying, the printable area will be 0.
Other Sizes than Letter, Legal, Envelopes Size Printable Area (width x height) A5 5.56 x 7.95 inches (141.2 x 202.0 mm) A4 8.00 x 11.38 inches (203.2 x 289.0 mm) B5 6.90 x 9.80 inches (175.2 x 249.0 mm) 4" x 6" (10 x 15 cm) 3.73 x 5.69 inches (94.8 x 144.4 mm) 5" x 7" (13 x 18 cm) 4.73 x 6.69 inches (120.2 x 169.8 mm) 8" x 10" (20 x 25 cm) 7.73 x 9.69 inches (196.4 x 246.0 mm) Recommended printing area A: 1.80 inches (45.8 mm) B: 1.45 inches (36.8 mm) Printable area C: 0.12 inch (3.0 mm) D: 0.
Letter, Legal Size Printable Area (width x height) Letter 8.00 x 10.69 inches (203.2 x 271.4 mm) Legal 8.00 x 13.69 inches (203.2 x 347.6 mm) Recommended printing area A: 1.80 inches (45.8 mm) B: 1.45 inches (36.8 mm) Printable area C: 0.12 inch (3.0 mm) D: 0.20 inch (5.0 mm) E: 0.25 inch (6.4 mm) F: 0.25 inch (6.
Envelopes Size Recommended Printing Area (width x height) Envelope DL 3.88 x 6.69 inches (98.8 x 170.0 mm) Envelope Com 10 3.68 x 8.24 inches (93.5 x 209.3 mm) Recommended printing area Envelope DL A: 0.83 inch (21.0 mm) B: 1.14 inches (29.0 mm) C: 0.22 inch (5.6 mm) D: 0.22 inch (5.6 mm) Envelope Com 10 A: 0.12 inch (3.0 mm) B: 1.14 inches (29.0 mm) C: 0.22 inch (5.6 mm) D: 0.22 inch (5.
Loading Originals Position to Load Originals Loading Originals on the Platen Glass Loading Documents in the ADF (Auto Document Feeder) How to Load Originals for Each Function Originals You Can Load 182
Position to Load Originals The machine has two positions to load originals: platen glass and ADF (Auto Document Feeder). Select the position to load the original according to the size, type, or usage. Originals You Can Load Loading Documents, Photos, or Book on the platen glass Loading Two or More Sheets of Document of the Same Size and Thickness in the ADF You can also load a sheet of document in the ADF. Note • In the ADF, the two-sided document can also be scanned or copied.
Loading Originals on the Platen Glass 1. Open the document cover. Important • When opening or closing the document cover, do not touch the buttons and touch screen on the operation panel. Doing so may result in an unexpected operation. 2. Load the original WITH THE SIDE TO SCAN FACING DOWN on the platen glass. Originals You Can Load How to Load Originals for Each Function Important • Be sure to observe the following when loading the original on the platen glass. • Do not place any objects weighing 4.
Loading Documents in the ADF (Auto Document Feeder) Note • To scan a document at optimum quality, load it on the platen glass. 1. Make sure that any original has been removed from the platen glass. 2. Open the document tray. 3. Insert the document in the document tray until you hear a beep sound. Load the document WITH THE SIDE TO SCAN FACING UP in the document tray.
How to Load Originals for Each Function Load the original in the correct position according to the function to use. If you do not load the original correctly, it may not be scanned properly. Loading the Original to Be Aligned with the alignment mark • Load originals to copy or fax • Select Document or Photo for Doc.type in Scan and specify a standard size (A4, Letter, etc.
Loading Two or More Originals on the platen glass • Select Photo for Doc.type in Scan, and specify Auto multi scan for Scan size to scan two or more originals • Scan two or more printed photos, postcards, or business cards with a software application on a computer Place the originals WITH THE SIDE TO SCAN FACING DOWN. Allow 0.4 inch (1 cm) or more space between the edges (diagonally striped area) of the platen glass and the originals, and between the originals.
Originals You Can Load platen glass Item Details Types of originals - Text document, magazine, or newspaper - Printed photo, postcard, business card, or disc (BD/DVD/CD, etc.) - Documents that are not suitable for the ADF Size (width x height) Max. 8.5 x 11.7 inches (216 x 297 mm) Quantity 1 sheet or multiple sheets* Thickness Max. 0.12 inch (3.1 mm) * Two or more originals can be loaded on the platen glass depending on the selected function.
• • • • • Paper with sticky notes Carbon paper or carbon-backed paper Surface treated paper Onion skin or thin paper Photo or thick paper 189
Inserting the USB Flash Drive Inserting the USB Flash Drive Removing the USB Flash Drive 190
Inserting the USB Flash Drive Printable Image Data • This machine accepts images taken with a camera compliant with the Design rule for Camera File system (Exif 2.2/2.21/2.3 compliant), TIFF (Exif 2.2/2.21/2.3 compliant). Other image or movie types such as RAW images cannot be printed. • The machine accepts images scanned and saved with the machine when Doc.type is set to Photo and Format is set to JPEG (file extension ".jpg"). Note • This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft.
Removing the USB Flash Drive 1. Make sure that the machine is not reading or writing data from/to the USB flash drive. A message is displayed on the touch screen during such operations. Important • Do not remove the USB flash drive or turn off the power while the machine is reading or writing data from/to it. Note • If your USB flash drive has the access lamp, refer to the instruction manual supplied with the USB flash drive to check if the reading or writing operation is completed on the USB flash drive.
Replacing an Ink Tank Replacing an Ink Tank Checking the Ink Status 193
Replacing an Ink Tank When remaining ink cautions or errors occur, the message will appear on the touch screen to inform you of the error. Take appropriate action according to the message. A Message Is Displayed Note • If print results become faint or white streaks appear despite sufficient ink levels, see Maintenance Procedure. Replacing Procedure When you need to replace an ink tank, follow the procedure below. Important • If you remove an ink tank, replace it immediately.
Caution • Do not hold the print head holder to stop or move it forcibly. Do not touch the print head holder until it stops completely. Important • Do not remove an ink tank until a new one is prepared to be installed. • Once you remove an ink tank, the machine will not operate until a new one is installed. • Once you remove an ink tank, the machine will not operate even if the removed ink tank is just reinstalled. • You cannot remove the ink tank which is not placed at the replacement position.
Important • Place the removed ink tank into a plastic bag immediately after removing from the machine. Otherwise, ink residue may stain your clothes or the surrounding area. • Do not touch other parts besides the ink tanks. • Discard the empty ink tank according to the local laws and regulations regarding disposal of consumables. • Handle the ink tanks carefully. Do not drop or apply excessive pressure to them. 3. Remove the ink tank from the package.
4. Insert a new ink tank aligning it with the installation guide (E) of the machine. Important • You cannot insert the ink tank in the wrong position. Check the label under the installation position, then install the ink tank in the correct position. 5. Push the ink tank until it snaps firmly into place.
6. Tap Exit on the touch screen. If Next is displayed on the screen, it means there is another ink tank that can be replaced. If you want to replace this ink tank, tap Next and then repeat procedures from step 2. To exit the ink tank replacement, tap Next until Exit is displayed on the screen. The print head holder moves to the standby position. You cannot remove the ink tank while at this position. Important • You cannot print unless all the ink tanks are installed. Be sure to install all the ink tanks.
After replacing the ink tanks, the machine starts mixing the ink automatically. Wait until the machine has stopped making operating noise. (This takes about 1 to 2 minutes.) Note • If the error message appears on the touch screen, take appropriate action. A Message Is Displayed • If the print head is out of alignment, as indicated by misaligned printed ruled lines or similar symptoms, align the print head. • The machine may make noise during operation.
Checking the Ink Status from Your Computer You can check the remaining ink level and the ink tank types for your model. 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Launching the Canon IJ Status Monitor On the Maintenance tab, click View Printer Status. The Canon IJ Status Monitor opens and displays an image of the ink status. Note • The information displayed on the Canon IJ Status Monitor may differ depending on the country or region where you are using your printer. 3.
Checking the Ink Status Checking the Ink Status with the Touch Screen on the Machine You can also check the ink status on the computer screen.
Checking the Ink Status with the Touch Screen on the Machine 1. Make sure that the power is turned on, and display the HOME screen. If the HOME screen is not displayed, press the HOME button to display it. 2. Tap on the HOME screen. Using the Operation Panel A symbol appears in the area (A) if there is any information about the remaining ink level. Example: Ink tank is running low. Prepare a new ink tank. Note • The above screen shows estimated ink levels.
Maintenance When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect Performing Maintenance from a Computer Cleaning the Machine 203
When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect Maintenance Procedure Printing the Nozzle Check Pattern Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern Cleaning the Print Head Cleaning the Print Head Deeply Aligning the Print Head Aligning the Print Head Manually 204
Maintenance Procedure If print results are blurred, colors are not printed correctly, or print results are unsatisfactory (e.g. misaligned printed ruled lines), perform the maintenance procedure below. Note • Increasing the print quality in the printer driver settings may improve the print result. Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data When the Print Results Are Blurred or Uneven: Step1 Print the nozzle check pattern.
If the problem is still not resolved, the print head may be damaged. Contact the service center. When the Print Results Are Not Even such as the Ruled Lines Are Misaligned: Step Align the print head.
Printing the Nozzle Check Pattern Print the nozzle check pattern to determine whether the ink ejects properly from the print head nozzle. Note • When the ink has run out during printing the nozzle check pattern, the error message will appear on the touch screen. A Message Is Displayed You need to prepare: a sheet of A4 or Letter-sized plain paper 1. Make sure that the power is turned on. 2. Load a sheet of A4 or Letter-sized plain paper in the cassette 1.
The confirmation screen will appear. 7. Tap Yes. The nozzle check pattern will be printed and two pattern confirmation screens will appear on the touch screen. 8. Examine the nozzle check pattern.
Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern Examine the nozzle check pattern, and clean the print head if necessary. 1. Check if there are missing lines in the pattern C or horizontal white streaks in the pattern D. A: No missing lines/No horizontal white streaks B: Lines are missing/Horizontal white streaks are present E: Number of sheets printed so far 2. Select the pattern that is closer to the printed nozzle check pattern on the confirmation screen.
For B (lines are missing or horizontal white streaks are present) in the pattern C or pattern D, or in both patterns: The cleaning is required. Tap Also B, then tap Yes on the cleaning confirmation screen. The machine starts cleaning the print head. Cleaning the Print Head Note • The total number of sheets printed so far is shown in increments of 50 sheets on the printout of the nozzle check pattern.
Cleaning the Print Head Clean the print head if lines are missing or if horizontal white streaks are present in the printed nozzle check pattern. Cleaning unclogs the nozzles and restores the print head condition. Cleaning the print head consumes ink, so clean the print head only when necessary. Note • You can also clean the print head using the computer. When using the computer, select the ink group to clean, then start cleaning.
6. Tap Cleaning. The confirmation screen will appear. 7. Tap Yes. The machine starts cleaning the print head. Do not perform any other operations until the machine completes the cleaning of the print head. This takes about 2 minutes. The pattern print confirmation screen will appear. 8. Tap Yes. The nozzle check pattern will be printed. 9. Examine the nozzle check pattern. Note • If the problem is not resolved after cleaning the print head twice, clean the print head deeply.
Cleaning the Print Head Deeply If print quality does not improve by the standard cleaning of the print head, clean the print head deeply. Cleaning the print head deeply consumes more ink than the standard cleaning of the print head, so clean the print head deeply only when necessary. Note • You can also clean the print head deeply using the computer. When using the computer, select the ink group to clean, then start the deep cleaning.
6. Tap Deep cleaning. The confirmation screen will appear. 7. Tap Yes. The machine starts cleaning the print head deeply. Do not perform any other operations until the machine completes the deep cleaning of the print head. This takes about 2 to 3 minutes. The pattern print confirmation screen will appear. 8. Tap Yes. The nozzle check pattern will be printed. 9. When the completion message appears, tap OK. 10. Examine the nozzle check pattern.
Aligning the Print Head If printed ruled lines are misaligned or print results are otherwise unsatisfactory, adjust the print head position. Note • When the ink has run out during printing the nozzle check pattern, the error message will appear on the touch screen. A Message Is Displayed You need to prepare: a sheet of A4 or Letter-sized plain paper (including recycled paper)* * Be sure to use paper that is white and clean on both sides. 1. Make sure that the power is turned on. 2.
The confirmation screen will appear. 7. Tap Yes. The print head alignment sheet will be printed and the print head position will be adjusted automatically. This takes about 3 to 4 minutes. Note • If the automatic adjustment of the print head position has failed, the error message appears on the touch screen. A Message Is Displayed 8. When the completion message appears, tap OK.
Aligning the Print Head Manually If printed ruled lines are misaligned or print results are still not satisfactory after adjusting the print head position automatically, adjust the print head position manually. Note • For details on adjusting the print head position automatically, see Aligning the Print Head. You need to prepare: two sheets of A4 or Letter-sized plain paper 1. Make sure that the power is turned on. 2. Load two sheets of A4 or Letter-sized plain paper in the cassette 1.
The confirmation screen will appear. Note • To print and check the current head position adjustment values, select Print the head alignment value. 7. Tap Yes. The print head alignment pattern is printed. 8. When the message "Did the patterns print correctly?" appears, confirm that the pattern is printed correctly, tap Yes. 9. Confirm the message, then tap Next. The input screen for the head position adjustment values will appear. 10.
Note • If it is difficult to pick the best pattern, pick the setting that produces the least noticeable vertical streaks. A: Unnoticeable vertical streaks B: Noticeable vertical streaks 11. Repeat the same procedure until you finish inputting the pattern number for columns B to M, then tap OK. 12. Confirm the message, then tap OK. The second pattern is printed. 13.
Note • If it is difficult to pick the best pattern, pick the setting that produces the least noticeable horizontal streaks. C: Unnoticeable horizontal streaks D: Noticeable horizontal streaks 1. Repeat the same procedure until you finish inputting the pattern number for columns O to T, then tap OK. For column P, pick the least noticeable vertical streaks. 2. Confirm the message, then tap OK.
Performing Maintenance from a Computer Cleaning the Print Heads from Your Computer Aligning the Print Head Position from Your Computer Use Your Computer to Print a Nozzle Check Pattern 221
Cleaning the Print Heads from Your Computer The print head cleaning function allows you to clear up clogged print head nozzle. Perform print head cleaning if printing is faint or a specific color fails to print, even though there is enough ink. The procedure for cleaning the print head is as follows: Cleaning 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Click Cleaning on the Maintenance tab When the Print Head Cleaning dialog box opens, select the ink group for which cleaning is to be performed.
When the Deep Cleaning dialog box opens, select the ink group for which deep cleaning is to be performed. Click Initial Check Items to display the items you need to check before performing deep cleaning. 3. Execute deep cleaning Make sure that the printer is on and then click Execute. Click OK when the confirmation message appears. Print head deep cleaning starts. 4. Complete deep cleaning The Nozzle Check dialog box opens after the confirmation message. 5.
Aligning the Print Head Position from Your Computer Print head alignment corrects the installation positions of the print head and improves deviated colors and lines. This printer supports two head alignment methods: automatic head alignment and manual head alignment. Normally, the printer is set for automatic head alignment. If the printing results of automatic print head alignment are not satisfactory, perform manual head alignment.
Note • To print and check the current setting, open the Start Print Head Alignment dialog box, and click Print Alignment Value.
Aligning the Print Head Position Manually from Your Computer Print head alignment corrects the installation positions of the print head and improves deviated colors and lines. This printer supports two head alignment methods: automatic head alignment and manual head alignment. Normally, the printer is set for automatic head alignment. If the printing results of automatic print head alignment are not satisfactory, perform manual head alignment.
• Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Media Type) • Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Paper Size) 7. Execute head alignment Make sure that the printer is on and click Align Print Head. Follow the instruction in the message. Important • Do not open the operation panel while printing is in progress. 8. Check the printed pattern Enter the numbers of the patterns with the least noticeable streaks in the associated boxes.
10. Check the printed pattern Enter the numbers of the patterns with the least noticeable stripes or streaks in the associated boxes. Even if the patterns with the least noticeable stripes or streaks are clicked in the preview window, their numbers are automatically entered in the associated boxes. When you have entered all the necessary values, click OK. Note • If it is difficult to pick the best pattern, pick the setting that produces the least noticeable horizontal stripes.
Use Your Computer to Print a Nozzle Check Pattern The nozzle check function allows you to check whether the print head is working properly by printing a nozzle check pattern. Print the pattern if printing becomes faint, or if a specific color fails to print. The procedure for printing a nozzle check pattern is as follows: Nozzle Check 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Click Nozzle Check on the Maintenance tab The Nozzle Check dialog box opens.
Related Topic Cleaning the Print Heads from Your Computer 230
Cleaning the Machine Cleaning the Exterior of the Machine Cleaning the Platen Glass and Document Cover Cleaning the ADF (Auto Document Feeder) Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller Cleaning the Inside of the Machine (Bottom Plate Cleaning) Cleaning the Pad in the Cassette 231
Cleaning the Exterior of the Machine Be sure to use a soft and dry cloth such as eyeglasses cleaning cloth and wipe off dirt on the surface gently. Smooth out wrinkles on the cloth if necessary before cleaning. Important • Be sure to turn off the power and unplug the power cord before cleaning the machine. • The power cannot be turned off while the machine is sending or receiving a fax, or when unsent faxes are stored in the machine's memory.
Cleaning the Platen Glass and Document Cover Important • Be sure to turn off the power and unplug the power cord before cleaning the machine. • The power cannot be turned off while the machine is sending or receiving a fax, or when unsent faxes are stored in the machine's memory. Make sure if the machine completed sending or receiving all the faxes before unplugging the power cord. • The machine cannot send or receive faxes when the power is turned off.
Cleaning the ADF (Auto Document Feeder) Be sure to use a soft, clean, lint-free and dry cloth to clean the ADF (Auto Document Feeder). Important • Be sure to turn off the power and unplug the power cord before cleaning the machine. • The power cannot be turned off while the machine is sending or receiving a fax, or when unsent faxes are stored in the machine's memory. Make sure if the machine completed sending or receiving all the faxes before unplugging the power cord.
4. After wiping, close the document feeder cover by pushing it until it clicks into place. 5. Close the document tray.
Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller If the paper feed roller is dirty or paper powder is attached to it, paper may not be fed properly. In this case, clean the paper feed roller. Cleaning will wear out the paper feed roller, so perform this only when necessary. You need to prepare: three sheets of A4 or Letter-sized plain paper 1. Make sure that the power is turned on. 2. Flick the HOME screen, then tap Setup. Using the Operation Panel The setup menu screen will appear. 3. Tap Maintenance.
11. Tap OK. The machine starts cleaning. The cleaning will be complete when the paper is ejected. 12. When the completion message appears, tap OK. If the problem is not resolved after cleaning the paper feed roller, contact the service center.
Cleaning the Inside of the Machine (Bottom Plate Cleaning) Remove stains from the inside of the machine. If the inside of the machine becomes dirty, printed paper may get dirty, so we recommend performing cleaning regularly. You need to prepare: a sheet of A4 or Letter-sized plain paper* * Be sure to use a new piece of paper. 1. Make sure that the power is turned on. 2. Flick the HOME screen, then tap Setup. Using the Operation Panel The setup menu screen will appear. 3. Tap Maintenance.
9. Load only this sheet of paper in the cassette 1 with the ridges of the creases facing up and the edge of the half with no crease facing to the far side. Important • The cassette 2 is not available for the Bottom Plate Cleaning procedure. Be sure to load paper in the cassette 1. 10. Extend the output tray extension, then open the paper output support. 11. Tap OK. The paper cleans the inside of the machine as it feeds through the machine. Check the folded parts of the ejected paper.
• The machine cannot send or receive faxes when the power is turned off. • If the power cord is unplugged, all documents stored in the machine's memory will be lost. Send or print a necessary document, or save it on a USB flash drive before unplugging the power cord.
Cleaning the Pad in the Cassette If the pad in a cassette is smeared with paper powder or dirt, two or more sheets of paper may be ejected. Follow the procedure below to clean the pad in a cassette. You need to prepare: cotton swab 1. Pull out the cassette 1 or cassette 2 from the machine, then remove all the paper. 2. Clean the pad (A) sideways with a moistened cotton swab. Important • After cleaning the smeared pad, dry it completely. For an example of the cassette 1: 3.
Changing the Machine Settings Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer Changing the Machine Settings Using the Operation Panel Registering the Favorite Settings (Custom profiles) Checking the Total Number of Uses of the Machine 242
Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer Changing the Print Options Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile Managing the Printer Power Reducing the Printer Noise Changing the Printer Operation Mode 243
Changing the Print Options You can change the detailed printer driver settings for print data that is sent from an application software. Check this check box if part of the image data is cut off, the paper source during printing differs from the driver settings, or printing fails. The procedure for changing the print options is as follows: 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Click Print Options... on the Page Setup tab The Print Options dialog box opens.
Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile You can register the frequently used printing profile to Commonly Used Settings on the Quick Setup tab. Unnecessary printing profiles can be deleted at any time. The procedure for registering a printing profile is as follows: Registering a Printing Profile 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2.
Important • To save the page size, orientation, and number of copies that was set in each sheet, click Options..., and check each item. Note • When you re-install the printer driver or upgrade the printer driver version, the print settings that are already registered will be deleted from Commonly Used Settings. Registered print settings cannot be saved and preserved. If a profile is deleted, register the print settings again. Deleting Unnecessary Printing Profile 1.
Managing the Printer Power This function allows you to manage the printer power from the printer driver. The procedure for managing the printer power is as follows: Power Off The Power Off function turns off the printer. When you use this function, you will not be able to turn the printer on from the printer driver. 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Execute power off Click Power Off on the Maintenance tab. When the confirmation message appears, click OK.
Reducing the Printer Noise The silent function allows you to reduce the operating noise of this printer. Select when you wish to reduce the operating noise of the printer at night, etc. Using this function may lower the print speed. The procedure for using the quiet mode is as follows: Quiet Settings 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Click Quiet Settings on the Maintenance tab The Quiet Settings dialog box opens.
Changing the Printer Operation Mode If necessary, switch between various modes of printer operation. The procedure for configuring Custom Settings is as follows: Custom Settings 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Make sure that the printer is on, and then click Custom Settings on the Maintenance tab The Custom Settings dialog box opens.
Ink Drying Wait Time You can set the length of the printer rest time until printing of the next page begins. Moving the slider to the right increases the pause time, and moving the slider to the left decreases the time. If the paper gets stained because the next page is ejected before the ink on the printed page dries, increase the ink drying wait time. Reducing the ink drying wait time speeds up printing. 4. Apply the settings Click OK and when the confirmation message appears, click OK.
Changing the Machine Settings Using the Operation Panel Changing the Machine Settings Using the Operation Panel FAX settings Print settings LAN settings Device user settings Language selection Firmware update Cassette settings Administrator password setting Operation restrictions Reset setting About ECO settings About Quiet setting Using the Machine with the Access Point Mode 251
Changing the Machine Settings Using the Operation Panel This section describes the procedure to change the settings in the Device settings screen, taking the steps to specify Prevent paper abrasion as an example. 1. Make sure that the machine is turned on. 2. Flick the HOME screen, then tap Setup. Using the Operation Panel 3. Tap Device settings. The Device settings screen is displayed. 4. Tap the setting item to adjust. The setting screen for the selected item is displayed. 5.
You can select the setting menus below. FAX settings Print settings LAN settings Device user settings Language selection Firmware update Cassette settings Administrator password setting Operation restrictions Reset setting Important • Depending on the setting item, authentication by the administrator password is required. About the Machine Administration If you do not know the administrator password, ask the administrator of the machine you are using.
FAX settings Important • This setting item is for the administrator. This section describes the setting items in FAX settings. FAX user settings Advanced FAX settings Auto print settings Auto save setting Security control Easy setup Note • Before changing the settings, you can confirm the current settings by printing USER'S DATA LIST. Summary of Reports and Lists FAX user settings • User information settings Registers your name and fax/telephone number printed on sent faxes.
If you select ON, the machine transmits the fax after confirming the dial tone. Note • This setting may not be available depending on the country or region of purchase. • Pause time settings Sets the length of pause time for each when you enter "P" (pause). • TTI position Selects the position of the sender information (outside or inside the image area). • Remote RX Enables/disables remote reception. If you select ON, you can specify the remote reception ID.
Auto print settings • Received documents Selects whether to print the received fax automatically when receiving a fax. If you select Do not print, the received fax is stored in the machine's memory. For details on the received fax stored in the machine's memory: Document Stored in Machine's Memory • Activity report Selects whether to print ACTIVITY REPORT automatically. If you select Print, the machine prints ACTIVITY REPORT for the 20 histories of sent and received faxes automatically.
• Check RX FAX information If you select ON, the machine checks whether the recipient's fax machine information matches the dialed number. If it matches the number, the machine starts to send faxes. Preventing Mistransmission of Faxes • Hook key setting If you select Enable, you can use the on hook function. • FAX reception reject If you select ON, the machine rejects the reception of faxes with no sender information or faxes from specific senders.
Print settings • Prevent paper abrasion Use this setting only if the print surface becomes smudged. Important • Be sure to set this back to OFF after printing since it may result in lower printing speed or lower print quality.
LAN settings Important • This setting item is for the administrator. • Change LAN Enables either wireless LAN, wired LAN, or access point mode. You can also disable all. • Wireless LAN setup Selects the setup method for wireless LAN connection. Note • You can also enter this setting menu by selecting WLAN on the HOME screen. In this case, enable wireless LAN. When this menu is selected, the machine starts searching for a WPS-compatible access point.
Connection Active/Inactive SSID XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Communication mode Infrastructure Channel XX Wireless LAN security Inactive/WEP(64bit)/WEP(128bit)/WPA-PSK(TKIP)/WPA-PSK(AES)/WPA2PSK(TKIP)/WPA2-PSK(AES) IPv4 address XXX. XXX. XXX. XXX IPv4 subnet mask XXX. XXX. XXX. XXX IPv4 default gateway XXX. XXX. XXX.
IPv6 default gateway XXXX: XXXX: XXXX: XXXX: XXXX: XXXX: XXXX: XXXX MAC address XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX IPsec settings Enable (ESP)/Enable (ESP & AH)/Enable (AH)/Disable Pre-shared key XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Printer name XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Bonjour service name XXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXX ("XX" represents alphanumeric characters.) ◦ AP mode setting list The list of access point mode settings of this machine is displayed on the touch screen. The following setting items are displayed.
Bonjour service name XXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXX ("XX" represents alphanumeric characters.) ◦ Print LAN details You can print out the network settings of the machine such as its IP address and SSID. For more information on the machine's network setting is printed out: Printing Out Network Setting Information Important • This printout contains valuable information about your computer. Handle it with care.
Service name Specifies the Bonjour service name. You can use up to 48 characters for the name. Note • You cannot use the same service name as that already used for other LAN connected devices. ◦ LPR protocol setting Activates/deactivates the LPR setting. ◦ Wireless LAN DRX setting Selecting Enable allows you to activate discontinuous reception when using wireless LAN. It allows you to save electricity.
Device user settings Important • This setting item is for the administrator. • Date/time setting Sets the current date and time. Setting the Sender Information • Date display format Sets the format of dates displayed on the touch screen and printed on sent faxes and photos. Note • When ON is selected for Print date on the print settings screen in printing from a USB flash drive, the shooting date is printed in the date display format you selected.
Selects the alarm volume. ◦ Line monitor volume Selects the line monitor volume. ◦ Offhook alarm Selects the alarm volume when the phone receiver is not put on the hook properly. • Country or region Selects the country or region where you are using the machine. Note • This setting may not be available depending on the country or region of purchase. • Device info sending setting Selects whether you will send the printer usage information to Canon server.
Language selection Important • This setting item is for the administrator. Changes the language for the messages and menus on the touch screen.
Firmware update Important • This setting item is for the administrator. You can update the firmware of the machine, check the firmware version, or perform settings of a notification screen, a DNS server and a proxy server. Note • Only Check current version is available when Disable LAN is selected for Change LAN in LAN settings. • Install update Performs the firmware update of the machine. If you select Yes, the firmware update starts. Follow the on-screen instructions to perform update.
Cassette settings By registering the paper size and the media type loaded in the cassette, you can prevent the machine from misprinting by displaying the message before printing starts when the paper size or the media type of the loaded paper differs from the print settings. In addition, you can allow the machine to switch the paper source automatically when a cassette runs out of paper.
Administrator password setting Important • This setting item is for the administrator. You can specify or disable the administrator password. Specifying the administrator password requires you to enter the password to change the machine settings or connection settings. Entering the administrator password is required to change the setting items in the following menus.
Operation restrictions Important • This setting item is for the administrator. You can restrict printing, copying, or faxing operations or to use a USB flash drive or a shared folder on the computer. Note • When no operation restrictions are enabled, the confirmation screen to enable operation restrictions is displayed. Tapping Yes enables you to restrict operations. If you have already restricted any operations, the menu items are displayed.
Reset setting Important • This setting item is for the administrator. Reverts all settings you made to the machine back to the default. However, some data may not be changed, depending on the current usage state of your machine. Important • Depending on the setting item, it is necessary to perform connection or setup again after you have reverted the setting back to the default. • Web service setup only Reverts the Web service settings back to the default.
1. Display the User information settings screen. Setting the Sender Information 2. Tap the user's name or the telephone number, then delete all characters or numbers. 3. Tap OK when you finished deleting all characters or numbers.
About ECO settings This setting allows you to use automatic duplex printing as a default to save paper and to turn the machine on/off automatically to save electricity. Using Duplex Printing Turning on/off the machine automatically Important • Depending on the setting item, authentication by the administrator password is required. About the Machine Administration If you do not know the administrator password, ask the administrator of the machine you are using.
Turning on/off the machine automatically Follow the procedure below to use power saving function. 1. Make sure that the machine is turned on. 2. Flick the HOME screen, then tap ECO settings. Using the Operation Panel 3. Tap Power control. 4. Specify the settings as necessary. When you specify the time and day to turn the machine on: 1. Tap Power control - ON settings. 2. Tap ON on the displayed screen. The screen below is displayed. 3. Tap the time. The screen below is displayed. 4.
You can specify the hour from 0 to 24 and specify the minute in increments of 10 minutes. 5. Tap OK to confirm the time to turn the machine on. After confirming the time to turn the machine on, the screen to specify the day is displayed. Tap the day, tap Enable or Disable, then tap OK. The setting is valid on the day(s) you select Enable for. When you specify the time and day to turn the machine off: 1. Tap Power control - OFF settings. 2. Tap ON on the displayed screen. The screen below is displayed. 3.
About Quiet setting Enables this function on the machine if you want to reduce the operating noise, such as when printing at night. In addition, you can specify the time range to reduce the operating noise. Important • Set the current date and time in advance. Setting the Sender Information • Authentication by the administrator password may be required to change the setting. About the Machine Administration If you do not know the administrator password, ask the administrator of the machine you are using.
1. Tap the numbers to specify the starting time. You can specify the hour from 0 to 24. 2. Tap to confirm the starting time. After specifying the starting time, specify the ending time following the same procedure. B. Tap to confirm the time to start and to end. You can reduce the operating noise during the specified time. The confirmation screen is displayed, then the icon appears as the Quiet setting menu icon. Important • Operating speed may be reduced compared to when the quiet mode is not selected.
Using the Machine with the Access Point Mode By using the machine as an access point in an environment that does not have wireless LAN router or access point, or by using the machine as an access point temporarily in an environment that has wireless LAN router or access point, you can connect the machine to an external device such as a computer or a smartphone and print/scan from them. This section describes how to enable the access point mode, the access point name of the machine, and the security setting.
Note • Tapping Details displays the security setting. The password required when connecting from the external device is also displayed. • You can specify the access point name (SSID) and the security setting optionally. Setting of the Access Point Mode 7. Tap OK. The access point mode is enabled and the machine can be used as an access point. Printing/Scanning with the Access Point Mode Print/Scan with the access point mode following the procedure below. 1.
3. Tap LAN settings. 4. Tap Change LAN. 5. Tap Wireless LAN active. If you do not use the machine over wireless LAN, select Wired LAN active or Disable LAN. Setting of the Access Point Mode Specify the settings for the access point mode following the procedure below. 1. Make sure that the machine is turned on. 2. Flick the HOME screen, then tap Setup. Using the Operation Panel 3. Tap Device settings. 4. Tap LAN settings. 5. Tap Other settings. 6. Tap Access point mode settings.
13. Enter the password (8 to 10 characters). 14. Tap OK to finish entering the password. 15. Tap OK to finish specifying the password setting. Note • If you change the access point mode setting of the machine, also change the access point setting of the external device such as a computer or a smartphone.
Registering the Favorite Settings (Custom profiles) You can register the favorite copying, scanning, or faxing settings and call them up from the HOME screen. You can register up to 20 settings. Registering the Setting Calling Up the Registered Setting Editing/Deleting the Registered setting Registering the Setting Tap Save profile on each standby screen or on the screen displayed after the settings are specified.
1. Make sure that the machine is turned on. 2. Flick the HOME screen, then tap Custom profiles. Using the Operation Panel 3. Tap Edit/delete. You can change the order or name of the registered settings and delete the settings. • To change the order of the registered settings 1. Tap Rearrange. 2. Tap the setting you want to move. 3. Tap or to move the selected setting. 4. Tap Apply. 5. Tap Exit. • To change the name of the registered settings 1. Tap Rename. 2. Tap the setting you want to rename. 3.
Checking the Total Number of Uses of the Machine You can check the total number of uses of the machine (e.g. the total number of printing, copying, sending/ receiving faxes, or scanning). 1. Make sure that the machine is turned on. 2. Flick the HOME screen, then tap Records of use. Using the Operation Panel The Records of use screen is displayed. 3. Tap the item to check. Total sheets used on the device Displays the total number of printing.
Information about Network Connection Useful Information about Network Connection 285
Useful Information about Network Connection Default Values Set at Factory (Network) Connecting the Machine to the Computer Using a USB Cable When Detecting the Printers Have the Same Name during Setup Connecting to Other Computer with LAN/Changing the Connection Method from USB to LAN Printing Out Network Setting Information 286
Default Values Set at Factory (Network) Default Values of the LAN Connection Item The default Change LAN Disable LAN SSID BJNPSETUP Communication mode Infrastructure Wireless LAN security Disable IP address (IPv4) Auto setup IP address (IPv6) Auto setup Set printer name* XXXXXXXXXXXX Enable/disable IPv6 Enable Enable/disable WSD Enable Timeout setting 1 minute Enable/disable Bonjour Enable Service name Canon MB5300 series LPR protocol setting Enable Wireless LAN DRX setting Enabl
Connecting the Machine to the Computer Using a USB Cable Connect the machine and the computer using a USB cable as the illustration below. The USB port is located on the rear of the machine.
When Detecting the Printers Have the Same Name during Setup When the printer is detected during setup, you may see multiple printers of the same name on the detection result screen. Select a printer with checking the MAC address or the serial number set to the printer against that on the detection result screen. Note • A serial number may not be displayed on the detection result screen.
Connecting to Other Computer with LAN/Changing the Connection Method from USB to LAN To add the computer connecting the machine with LAN or to change the connection method between the machine and the computer from USB to LAN, perform setup with the Setup CD-ROM or perform it according to the instructions on our website. Connecting to Other Computer with LAN To add the computer connecting the machine with LAN, perform setup with the Setup CD-ROM or perform it according to the instructions on our website.
Printing Out Network Setting Information You can print out the current network settings of the machine using the operation panel of the machine. Important • This print out contains valuable information about your computer. Handle it with care. 1. Make sure that the machine is turned on. 2. Load a sheet of A4 or Letter-sized plain paper. 3. Flick the HOME screen, then tap Setup. Using the Operation Panel The menu screen is displayed. 4. Tap Device settings. 5. Tap LAN settings. 6.
Authentication Method of the Authentication none/auto/open/shared/WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK Signal Strength Signal Strength 0 to 100 [%] TCP/IP Version TCP/IP Version IPv4 & IPv6/IPv4 IPv4 IP Address Selected IP Address (IPv4) XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX IPv4 Default Gateway Default Gateway (IPv4) XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX Subnet Mask Subnet Mask XXX.XXX.XXX.
WSD WSD setting Enable/Disable WSD Timeout Timeout 1/5/10/15/20 [min] LPR Protocol LPR protocol setting Enable/Disable Bonjour Bonjour setting Enable/Disable Bonjour Service Name Bonjour service name Bonjour service name (Up to 52 alphanumeric characters) DNS Server Getting DNS Server automatically Auto/Manual Primary Server Primary server address XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX Secondary Server Secondary server address XXX.XXX.XXX.
About Network Communication Changing and Confirming Network Settings Screens for Network Connection of IJ Network Tool Other Screens of IJ Network Tool Appendix for Network Communication 294
Changing and Confirming Network Settings IJ Network Tool Changing the Settings in the Wireless LAN Sheet Changing the WEP Detailed Settings Changing the WPA/WPA2 Detailed Settings Changing the Settings in the Wired LAN Sheet Changing the Settings in the Admin Password Sheet Monitoring Wireless Network Status Initializing the Network Settings of the Machine Viewing the Modified Settings 295
IJ Network Tool IJ Network Tool is a utility that enables you to display and modify the machine network settings. It is installed when the machine is set up. Important • To use the machine over LAN, make sure you have the equipment necessary for the connection type, such as an access point or a LAN cable. • Do not start up IJ Network Tool while printing. • Do not print when IJ Network Tool is running.
Changing the Settings in the Wireless LAN Sheet To change the wireless network settings of the printer, connect the printer and the computer with a USB cable temporarily. If you modify the wireless network settings of the computer over wireless connection without USB connection, your computer may not be able to communicate with the machine after modifying the settings. Note • This screen is not available depending on the printer you are using.
Note • Enter the same SSID that the access point is configured to use. The SSID is case-sensitive. Encryption Method: Select the encryption method used over the wireless LAN. You can change WEP settings with selecting Use WEP and clicking Configuration.... Changing the WEP Detailed Settings You can change WPA/WPA2 settings with selecting Use WPA/WPA2 and clicking Configuration....
Changing the WEP Detailed Settings Note • This screen is not available depending on the printer you are using. To change the wireless network settings of the printer, connect the printer and the computer with a USB cable temporarily. If you modify the wireless network settings of the computer over wireless connection without USB connection, your computer may not be able to communicate with the machine after modifying the settings. 1. Start up IJ Network Tool. 2. Select the printer in Printers:.
2. Key Length: Select either 64bit or 128bit. 3. Key Format: Select either ASCII or Hex. 4. Key ID: Select the Key ID (index) set to the access point. 5. Authentication: Select the authentication method to authenticate the printer's access to the access point. Normally, select Auto. If you want to specify the method manually, select Open System or Shared Key according to the setting of the access point. 7. Click OK.
Changing the WPA/WPA2 Detailed Settings Note • This screen is not available depending on the printer you are using. To change the wireless network settings of the printer, connect the printer and the computer with a USB cable temporarily. If you modify the wireless network settings of the computer over wireless connection without USB connection, your computer may not be able to communicate with the machine after modifying the settings.
8. Enter the passphrase, then click Next>. Enter the passphrase set to the access point. The passphrase should be a string of 8 to 63 alphanumeric characters or a 64-digit hexadecimal value. If you do not know the access point passphrase, refer to the instruction manual provided with the access point or contact its manufacturer. The dynamic encryption method is selected from either TKIP (basic encryption) or AES (secure encryption) automatically.
Important • If the printer cannot communicate with the computer after the encryption type of the printer was switched, make sure that encryption types for the computer and the access point match that set to the printer. Note • Changing the network settings with the USB cable temporarily may switch the default printer. In this case, reset Set as Default Printer.
Changing the Settings in the Wired LAN Sheet Note • This screen is not available depending on the printer you are using. • Activate the wired LAN setting of the printer to change the settings in the Wired LAN sheet. 1. Start up IJ Network Tool. 2. Select the printer in Printers:. 3. Select Configuration... from the Settings menu. 4. Click the Wired LAN tab. The Wired LAN sheet is displayed. For details on the Wired LAN sheet, see Wired LAN Sheet. 5. Change the settings or confirm.
Changing the Settings in the Admin Password Sheet Note • You cannot change the settings when using the access point mode. 1. Start up IJ Network Tool. 2. Select the printer in Printers:. 3. Select Configuration... from the Settings menu. 4. Click the Admin Password tab. The Admin Password sheet is displayed. For details on the Admin Password sheet, see Admin Password Sheet. 5. Change the settings or confirm. To use an administrator password, select the Use admin password check box and enter a password.
Monitoring Wireless Network Status Note • This screen is not available depending on the printer you are using. • When using the machine over the wired LAN, you cannot monitor network status. 1. Start up IJ Network Tool. 2. Select the printer in Printers:. 3. Select Status from the View menu. The Status screen is displayed and you can check the printer status and connection performance. Important • If the indicated value is low, move your printer closer to the wireless network device. 4.
6. Check the status. When the measurement is complete, the status is displayed. When is displayed in Connection Performance between the Printer and the Access Point:, the printer can communicate with the access point. Otherwise, refer to displayed comments and the following to improve the status of communication link, and click Remeasurement. • Check that the printer and the access point are located within the wireless connectivity range with no obstacles between them.
If still appears even if you have tried the above, finish the measurement, then restart the IJ Network Tool to start over the measurement. 7. Click Finish. Note • If any messages appear on Overall Network Performance:, move the machine and access point as instructed to improve the performance.
Initializing the Network Settings of the Machine Important • Note that initialization erases all network settings on the machine, printing or scanning operation from a computer over network may become impossible. To use the machine over network, perform setup with the Setup CD-ROM or perform setup according to the instructions on our website. 1. Start up IJ Network Tool. 2. Select the printer in Printers:. 3. Select Maintenance... from the Settings menu. The Maintenance screen is displayed. 4.
Viewing the Modified Settings The Confirmation screen is displayed when you modified the printer settings on the Configuration screen. When you click Yes on the Confirmation screen, the following screen is displayed for confirming the modified settings.
Screens for Network Connection of IJ Network Tool Canon IJ Network Tool Screen Configuration Screen Wireless LAN Sheet Search Screen WEP Details Screen WPA/WPA2 Details Screen Authentication Type Confirmation Screen PSK:Passphrase and Dynamic Encryption Setup Screen Setup Information Confirmation Screen Wired LAN Sheet Admin Password Sheet Network Information Screen Access Control Sheet Edit Accessible MAC Address Screen/Add Accessible MAC Address Screen Edit Accessible IP Address Screen/Add Accessible IP A
Canon IJ Network Tool Screen This section describes the items and menus displayed on the Canon IJ Network Tool screen. Items on the Canon IJ Network Tool Screen Canon IJ Network Tool Menus Items on the Canon IJ Network Tool Screen The following item is displayed on the Canon IJ Network Tool screen. 1. Printers: The printer name, status, printer model name, and port name are displayed. A check mark next to the printer in the Name list indicates it is set as the default printer.
Note • This item has the same function as Refresh in the View menu. 3. Configuration... Click to configure settings of the selected printer. Configuration Screen Note • You cannot configure a printer that has the status Not Found. • This item has the same function as Configuration... in the Settings menu. Canon IJ Network Tool Menus The following menu is displayed from the Canon IJ Network Tool screen. 1. File menu Exit Exits IJ Network Tool. 2.
• If No Driver is displayed for the name, associate the port with the printer. When the Printer Driver Is Not Associated with a Port • If Not Found is displayed for the status, check the followings: • The access point is turned on. • When using wired LAN, the LAN cable is connected properly. • If the printer on a network is not detected, make sure that the printer is turned on, then select Refresh. It may take several minutes to detect printers.
Maintenance... Displays the Maintenance screen to revert the network settings of the printer to factory default and to mount the card slot as the network drive. Maintenance Screen Set up printer's wireless LAN... You can change the access point mode settings. Perform settings following the message on the screen. If you change the Encryption Method: setting and the Password: setting on the Set up printer's wireless LAN screen, the changed settings are applied to the printer settings.
Configuration Screen You can change the configuration of the printer selected on the Canon IJ Network Tool screen. Click the tab to select the sheet to change the settings. The following screen is the example to change the setting on the Wireless LAN sheet. Note • This screen is not available depending on the printer you are using. For details on each sheet, see the following.
Wireless LAN Sheet Note • This screen is not available depending on the printer you are using. Allows you to set the printer with wireless LAN connection. To display the Wireless LAN sheet, click the Wireless LAN tab on the Configuration screen. 1. Network Type: Displays the wireless LAN mode currently selected. Infrastructure Connects the printer to the wireless LAN with an access point. Access point mode Connects external wireless communication devices (e.g.
3. Search... The Search screen is displayed to select an access point to connect to. Search Screen Note • When IJ Network Tool runs over a LAN, the button is grayed out and cannot be selected. Connect the printer and the computer with a USB cable temporarily to change the settings. 4. Encryption Method: Select the encryption method used over the wireless LAN. Do not use Select to disable encryption. Use WEP Transmission is encrypted using a WEP key you specified.
Search Screen Note • This screen is not available depending on the printer you are using. The access points detected are listed. 1. Detected Access Points: The signal strength from the access point, encryption type, name of access point, and the radio channel can be confirmed. Important • If you connect to a network that is not protected with security measures, there is a risk of disclosing data such as your personal information to a third party. Note • Signal strength is displayed as follows.
3. Set Click to set the access point's SSID in SSID: on the Wireless LAN sheet. Note • The WEP Details screen or the WPA/WPA2 Details screen appears if the selected access point is encrypted. In this case, configure the details to use the same encryption settings set to the access point. • Access points that cannot be used by this machine (including those configured to use different encryption methods) are displayed grayed out and cannot be configured.
WEP Details Screen Note • This screen is not available depending on the printer you are using. Specify the printer WEP settings. Note • When changing the password (WEP key) of the printer, the same change must be made to the password (WEP key) of the access point. 1. WEP Key: Enter the same key as the one set to the access point. The number of characters and character type that can be entered differ depending on the combination of the key length and key format.
WPA/WPA2 Details Screen Note • This screen is not available depending on the printer you are using. Specify the printer WPA/WPA2 settings. The value displayed on the screen differs depending on the present settings. 1. Authentication Type: Displays the type of authentication used for client authentication. This machine supports the PSK authentication method. 2. Dynamic Encryption Type: Displays the dynamic encryption method. 3. Change Settings... Displays the Authentication Type Confirmation screen.
Authentication Type Confirmation Screen Note • This screen is not available depending on the printer you are using. Type of authentication used for client authentication is displayed. 1. Authentication Type Type of authentication used for client authentication is displayed. PSK This machine supports the PSK authentication method. This authentication type PSK uses a passphrase.
PSK:Passphrase and Dynamic Encryption Setup Screen Note • This screen is not available depending on the printer you are using. Enter the passphrase and select the dynamic encryption method. 1. Passphrase: Enter the passphrase set to the access point. The passphrase should be a string of 8 to 63 alphanumeric characters or a 64-digit hexadecimal value. If you do not know the access point passphrase, refer to the instruction manual provided with the access point or contact its manufacturer. 2.
Setup Information Confirmation Screen Note • This screen is not available depending on the printer you are using. Displays the settings used for client authentication. Confirm the settings and click Finish.
Wired LAN Sheet Note • This screen is not available depending on the printer you are using. Allows you to set the printer with wired LAN connection. To display the Wired LAN sheet, click the Wired LAN tab on the Configuration screen. 1. TCP/IP Setup: Sets the IP address of the printer to be used over the LAN. Specify a value appropriate for your network environment. Get IP address automatically Select this option to use an IP address automatically assigned by a DHCP server.
Admin Password Sheet Set a password for the printer to allow specific people to perform setup and configurations operation. To display the Admin Password sheet, click the Admin Password tab on the Configuration screen. 1. Use admin password Set an administrator password with privileges to set up and change detailed options. To use this feature, select this check box and enter a password. 2. Password: Enter the password to set. 3. Password Confirmation: Enter the password again for confirmation.
Network Information Screen Display the network information that is set for the printers and the computers. To display the Network Information screen, select Network Information from the View menu. 1. OK Returns to the Canon IJ Network Tool screen. 2. Copy All Information All network information displayed is copied to the clipboard.
Access Control Sheet Note • This screen is not available depending on the printer you are using. You can register the MAC addresses or the IP addresses of computers or network devices to allow access. To display the Access Control sheet, click the Access Control tab on the Configuration screen. 1. Printer Access Control Type: Select the type of access control with which to limit access of computers or network devices to the printer over a network.
1. Enable printer access control(MAC address) Select to enable access control to the printer by MAC address. Note • The two types of access control (i.e., by MAC address and by IP address) can be enabled at the same time. An access control type is enabled as long as the Enable printer access control check box is selected, regardless of the type currently displayed by selecting in Printer Access Control Type:.
1. Enable printer access control(IP address) Select to enable access control to the printer by IP address. Note • The two types of access control (i.e., by MAC address and by IP address) can be enabled at the same time. An access control type is enabled as long as the Enable printer access control check box is selected, regardless of the type currently displayed by selecting in Printer Access Control Type:.
5. Delete Deletes the selected IP address from the list.
Edit Accessible MAC Address Screen/Add Accessible MAC Address Screen Note • This screen is not available depending on the printer you are using. The example screenshots in this section refer to the Add Accessible MAC Address Screen. 1. MAC Address: Enter the MAC address of a computer or a network device to allow access. 2. Comment: Optionally enter any information to identify the device, such as the name of the computer. Important • Comments will be displayed only on the computer used to enter them.
Edit Accessible IP Address Screen/Add Accessible IP Address Screen Note • This screen is not available depending on the printer you are using. The example screenshots in this section refer to the Add Accessible IP Address Screen. 1. Specification Method: Select either Single Address Specification or Range Specification to add the IP address(es). Single Address Specification Specify each IP address separately. Range Specification Specify a range of successive IP addresses. 2.
Other Screens of IJ Network Tool Canon IJ Network Tool Screen Status Screen Connection Performance Measurement Screen Maintenance Screen Network Setup of the Card Slot Screen Associate Port Screen Network Information Screen 335
Canon IJ Network Tool Screen This section describes the items and menus displayed on the Canon IJ Network Tool screen. Items on the Canon IJ Network Tool Screen Canon IJ Network Tool Menus Items on the Canon IJ Network Tool Screen The following item is displayed on the Canon IJ Network Tool screen. 1. Printers: The printer name, status, printer model name, and port name are displayed. A check mark next to the printer in the Name list indicates it is set as the default printer.
Note • This item has the same function as Refresh in the View menu. 3. Configuration... Click to configure settings of the selected printer. Configuration Screen Note • You cannot configure a printer that has the status Not Found. • This item has the same function as Configuration... in the Settings menu. Canon IJ Network Tool Menus The following menu is displayed from the Canon IJ Network Tool screen. 1. File menu Exit Exits IJ Network Tool. 2.
• If No Driver is displayed for the name, associate the port with the printer. When the Printer Driver Is Not Associated with a Port • If Not Found is displayed for the status, check the followings: • The access point is turned on. • When using wired LAN, the LAN cable is connected properly. • If the printer on a network is not detected, make sure that the printer is turned on, then select Refresh. It may take several minutes to detect printers.
Maintenance... Displays the Maintenance screen to revert the network settings of the printer to factory default and to mount the card slot as the network drive. Maintenance Screen Set up printer's wireless LAN... You can change the access point mode settings. Perform settings following the message on the screen. If you change the Encryption Method: setting and the Password: setting on the Set up printer's wireless LAN screen, the changed settings are applied to the printer settings.
Status Screen You can check the printer status and connection performance. To display the Status screen, select Status from the View menu. Note • This screen is not available depending on the printer you are using. • When using wired LAN, Signal Strength:, Link Quality: and Advanced Measurement... are not available. 1. Device Status: The device status is displayed as Available or Unavailable. 2. Signal Strength: Indicates the strength of the signal received by the printer, ranging from 0% to 100%. 3.
Connection Performance Measurement Screen Note • This screen is not available depending on the printer you are using. Displays to execute the connection performance measurement. Connection Performance Measurement Screen (Initial Screen) Connection Performance Measurement Screen (Completion Screen) Connection Performance Measurement Screen (Initial Screen) Click Next> to start measurement. Connection Performance Measurement Screen (Completion Screen) Displays when the measurement is finished.
1. Connection Performance between the Printer and the Access Point: A mark indicates the result of the connection performance measurement between the printer and the access point. : Good connection performance : Unstable connection performance : Cannot connect : Measurement is canceled, or cannot measure 2. Remeasurement Measures the connection performance again. Note • If any messages appear on Overall Network Performance:, move the machine and access point as instructed to improve the performance.
Maintenance Screen Displays to perform Setting Initialization and Network Setup of the Card Slot. To display the Maintenance screen, select Maintenance... from the Settings menu. 1. Setting Initialization Reverts all the network settings of the printer to factory default. Click Initialize to display the Initialize Settings screen and click Yes to initialize the network settings of the printer. Do not turn off the printer during initialization. Click OK when initialization is complete.
Network Setup of the Card Slot Screen Note • This screen is not available depending on the printer you are using. Displays settings of the card slot and allows you to map a card slot on the network as a network drive on the computer. Displays when you click Setup on the Maintenance screen.
1. Skip Completes the setup without mapping a network drive to the card slot. 2. Retry Returns to Network Setup of the Card Slot screen and re-executes the network drive mapping. 3. Cancel Cancels the card slot setup. When IJ Network Tool is running over LAN, the Cancel button is displayed grayed out and cannot be clicked.
Associate Port Screen Allows you to associate a created port with a printer driver. Select the printer for which you want to change the association, then click OK. Note • You cannot print with the printer unless the printer driver is associated with the port. 1. Model: Displays the name of device specified as a destination port. It is blank if the name of device is not detected. 2. Printer: Displays the printer driver installed in the computer.
Network Information Screen Display the network information that is set for the printers and the computers. To display the Network Information screen, select Network Information from the View menu. 1. OK Returns to the Canon IJ Network Tool screen. 2. Copy All Information All network information displayed is copied to the clipboard.
Appendix for Network Communication Using the Card Slot over a Network When the Printer Driver Is Not Associated with a Port About Technical Terms Restrictions About Firewall 348
Using the Card Slot over a Network Note • This screen is not available depending on the printer you are using. Mounting the Card Slot as the Network Drive Restrictions on Card Slot Use over a Network Mounting the Card Slot as the Network Drive The card slot must be mounted to use it over a network. To mount the card slot as the network drive, follow the procedure below. 1. Insert a memory card into the card slot of the machine. 2. Start up IJ Network Tool. 3. Select the machine in Printers:. 4.
7. Make sure that the card slot is mounted. When the card slot is mounted, the following icon appears on Computer (or My Computer). Restrictions on Card Slot Use over a Network • The card slot can be shared by multiple computers, if the machine is connected to a network. Multiple computers can read files from a memory card in the card slot at the same time. However, while one computer is writing a file into a memory card, other computers cannot access the same file.
When the Printer Driver Is Not Associated with a Port If No Driver is displayed for the printer's name on the Canon IJ Network Tool screen, the printer driver is not associated with a created port. To associate a port with a printer driver, follow the procedure below. 1. Start up IJ Network Tool. 2. Select the printer displayed as No Driver on Name. 3. Select Associate Port... on the Settings menu. The Associate Port screen is displayed. 4. Select a printer to associate with a port.
About Technical Terms In this section, technical terms used in the manual are explained. A B C D F I K L M O P R S T U W A • Access Point A wireless transceiver or base station that receives information from wireless clients/the machine and rebroadcasts it. Required in an infrastructure network. • Access point mode The machine is used as an access point to connect external wireless communication devices (e.g.
• Authentication Method The method that an access point uses to authenticate a printer through a wireless LAN. The methods are agreeable each other. When using WEP as an encryption method, the authentication method is able to fix to Open System or Shared Key. For WPA/WPA2, authentication method is PSK. ◦ Auto The printer automatically changes its authentication method to match the access point.
F • Firewall It is a system that prevents an unlawful computer access in the network. To prevent, you can use the firewall function of a broadband router, the security software installed in the computer, or operation system for computer. I • IEEE 802.11b International standard for wireless LAN using the 2.4 GHz frequency range with a throughput of up to 11 Mbps. • IEEE 802.11g International standard for wireless LAN using the 2.4 GHz frequency range with a throughput of up to 54 Mbps. Compatible with 802.
◦ Hex Specify a 10-digit or 26-digit string that can contain hexadecimal (0 to 9, A to F, and a to f). • Key Length Length of the WEP key. Select either 64 bits or 128 bits. Longer key length allows you to set a more complex WEP key. L • Link Quality The status of connection between the access point and the printer excluding noise (interference) is indicated with a value from 0 to 100%. • LPR A platform-independent printing protocol used in TCP/IP networks. It is not supported bidirectional communication.
S • Signal Strength The strength of the signal received by the printer from the access point is indicated with a value from 0 to 100%. • SSID Unique label for wireless LAN. It is often represented such as a network name or an access point name. SSID distinguishes one wireless LAN from another to prevent interference. The printer and all clients on a wireless LAN must use the same SSID in order to communicate with each other.
W • WCN (Windows Connect Now) Users running Windows Vista or later can obtain the setting information directly via wireless network (WCN-NET). • WEP/WEP Key An encryption method employed by IEEE 802.11. Shared security key used to encrypt and decrypt data sent over wireless networks. This printer supports key length of 64 bits or 128 bits, key format of ASCII code or Hexadecimal, and key number of 1 to 4.
• WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) WPS is a standard for easy and secure establishment of a wireless network. There are 2 primary methods used in the Wi-Fi Protected Setup: PIN entry: a mandatory method of setup for all WPS certified devices Push button configuration (PBC): an actual push button on the hardware or through a simulated push button in the software.
Restrictions If you use a printer over the wireless LAN, the printer may recognize nearby wireless systems, you should set a network key (WEP or WPA/WPA2) to the access point to encrypt wireless transmission. Wireless communication with a product that does not comply with the Wi-Fi standard cannot be guaranteed. Connecting with too many computers may affect the printer performance, such as printing speed.
About Firewall A firewall is a function of the security software installed in the computer or operation system for computer, and is a system that is designed to prevent unauthorized access to a network. Precautions When a Firewall Function is Enabled • A firewall function may limit communications between a printer and a computer. This may disable printer setup and communications.
Tips for Ensuring Optimal Printing Quality Useful Information about Ink Key Points to Successful Printing Be Sure to Check Paper Settings before Printing Be Sure to Set Cassette Paper Information after Loading Paper Canceling a Print Job Key to Enjoying Consistent Printing Quality Precautions for Safe Transport of the Machine 361
Useful Information about Ink How is ink used for various purposes other than printing? Ink may be used for purposes other than printing. When you use the Canon printer for the first time after you install the bundled ink tanks, the printer consumes a small amount of ink in the amount to enable printing by filling the nozzles of the Print Head with ink.
Key Points to Successful Printing Check the machine status before printing! • Is the print head OK? If a print head nozzle is clogged, print will be faint and papers will be wasted. Print the nozzle check pattern to check the print head. Maintenance Procedure • Is the inside of the machine smeared with ink? After printing large quantities of paper, the area where papers go through may get smeared with ink. Clean the inside of your machine with Bottom Plate Cleaning.
Be Sure to Check Paper Settings before Printing Before printing, make paper settings in the operation panel or the computer screen. There are various types of paper, such as paper with a special surface coating for printing photos at optimal quality and paper suitable for documents. Each media type has specific preset settings (how ink is used and sprayed, distance from nozzles, etc.), that allow you to print to that type with optimal image quality.
Be Sure to Set Cassette Paper Information after Loading Paper When you insert a cassette into the machine after loading paper, the screen for setting the type and size of paper is displayed. Set the cassette paper information according to the type and size of loaded paper. To prevent incorrect printing, this machine has a function that detects whether the information set for the paper loaded in the cassette matches the paper settings.
Canceling a Print Job Never press the ON button! If you press the ON button while printing is in progress, the print data sent from the computer queues in the machine and you may not be able to continue to print. Press the Stop button to cancel printing.
Key to Enjoying Consistent Printing Quality The key to printing with the optimal printing quality is to prevent the print head from drying or clogging. Always observe the following rules for optimal printing quality. Never unplug the power cord until the power is turned off! If you press the ON button to turn off the power, the machine caps the print head (nozzles) automatically to prevent from drying.
Precautions for Safe Transport of the Machine When relocating the machine, make sure of the following. Important • Pack the machine in a sturdy box so that it is placed with its bottom facing down, using sufficient protective material to ensure safe transport. • Always transport the machine with ink tanks installed. If you transport the machine without ink tanks, ink in the print head may leak. • With the print head and ink tank left installed in the machine, press the ON button to turn off the power.
7. Use adhesive tape to secure all the covers on the machine to keep them from opening and to prevent the cassettes from falling out during transportation. Then pack the machine in the plastic bag. 8. Attach the protective material to the machine when packing the machine in the box.
Legal Limitations on Use of Your Product and Use of Images It may be unlawful to make copies of, scan, print, or use reproductions of the following documents. The list provided is non-exhaustive. When in doubt, check with a legal representative in your jurisdiction.
Specifications General Specifications Printing resolution (dpi) 600 (horizontal) x 1200 (vertical) Interface USB Port: Hi-Speed USB *1 USB Flash Drive Port: USB flash drive LAN Port: Wired LAN: 100BASE-TX / 10BASE-T Wireless LAN: IEEE802.11n / IEEE802.11g / IEEE802.11b *2 *1 A computer that complies with Hi-Speed USB standard is required. Since the Hi-Speed USB interface is fully upwardly compatible with USB 1.1, it can be used at USB 1.1.
* With the Print Head and ink tanks installed. Print Head/Ink Total 4352 nozzles (BK 1280 nozzles, C/M/Y 512 x 6 nozzles) ADF capacity A4 or Letter size: max. 50 sheets (20 lb/75 g /m2 paper), up to 0.20 inch/5 mm in height Legal size: max. 10 sheets (20 lb/75 g /m2 paper), up to 0.04 inch/1 mm in height Other sizes: 1 sheet Copy Specifications Multiple copy max.
(Based on Canon COLOR FAX TEST SHEET.) Gradation Black: 256 levels Color: 24 bit Full Color (RGB each 8 bit) Density adjustment 3 levels Memory Transmission/reception: approx. 250 pages (Based on ITU-T No.1 chart for US specifications and Canon FAX Standard chart No.1 for others, both in standard mode.) Fax resolution Black Standard: 203 pels/inch x 98 lines/inch (8 pels/mm x 3.85 lines/mm) Black Fine, Photo: 203 pels/inch x 196 lines/inch (8 pels/mm x 7.
WCN (WCN-NET) Cableless setup Other Features: Administration password Minimum System Requirements Conform to the operating system's requirements when higher than those given here. Windows Operating System Windows 8, Windows 8.
Print from E-mail MAXIFY Cloud Link • An internet connection is required to view the Online Manual. • Windows: Operation can only be guaranteed on a computer with Windows 8.1, Windows 8, Windows 7, Windows Vista or Windows XP pre-installed. • Windows: A CD-ROM Drive or internet connection is required during software installation. • Windows: Internet Explorer 8, 9, 10 or 11 is required to install Easy-WebPrint EX. • Windows: Some functions may not be available with Windows Media Center. • Windows: .
Administrator Settings About the Machine Administration Setting the Administrator Password Restricting the Operation Sharing the Printer on a Network 376
About the Machine Administration Specifying the administrator password or restricting some operations allows you to manage the use of the machine. When you use the machine after specifying the administrator password or restricting some operations, it is recommended to assign an administrator. Important • When the administrator password is specified or some operations are restricted, the screens below are displayed.
Setting the Administrator Password You can specify or disable the administrator password. Specifying the administrator password requires you to enter the password to change the machine settings or connection settings. Entering the administrator password is required to change the setting items in the following menus.
8. Enter the administrator password. Tap the area to enter a password, then enter the password (0 to 32 alphanumeric characters). Tap OK when you finished entering the administrator password. 9. Tap Apply. 10. Enter the administrator password you specified again. Tap the area to enter a password, then enter the password you specified. Tap OK when you finished entering the administrator password. 11. Tap Apply. The administrator password is enabled.
Restricting the Operation You can restrict printing, copying, or faxing operations or to use a USB flash drive or a shared folder on the computer. 1. Make sure that the machine is turned on. 2. Flick the HOME screen, then tap Setup. Using the Operation Panel 3. Tap Device settings. 4. Tap Operation restrictions. 5. When the confirmation screen of operation restriction is displayed, tap Yes. If you have already performed operation restriction setting, the menu items are displayed.
7. Tap Exit. The operation restrictions you selected are enabled. Note • If you disable all restrictions, tap Cancel operation restrictions in step 5. When the confirmation screen is displayed, tap Yes. To disable each operation restriction, tap the item in step 6, then tap Do not restrict.
Sharing the Printer on a Network When computers are used in a network environment, documents can be printed from multiple computers that share a single printer. • Setting Up a Shared Printer This section describes how to set up the print server and the client. Note • The Windows versions of the computers connected to the network do not necessarily have to be the same. • To set up the fax driver, use the same procedure.
Setting Up a Shared Printer On the print server, set up sharing of the printer driver. Then from the client, set up the connection to the print server. 1. Install the printer driver on the print server system 2. Select as described below: • If you are using Windows 8.1, Windows 8, Windows Server 2012 R2, or Windows Server 2012, from the Desktop charms, select Settings -> Control Panel -> Hardware and Sound (Hardware) -> Devices and Printers The Devices and Printers window is displayed.
On the Sharing tab, check (or select) Share this printer, set the shared name as necessary, and then click OK. 5. If the print server and the client have different architectures (32 bit or 64 bit), install an additional driver 1. Display the Devices and Printers, Printers, or Printers and Faxes window. 2. Select as described below: • If you are using Windows 8.
Restrictions on Printer Sharing If you are using the XPS printer driver, replace "Canon IJ Preview" with "Canon IJ XPS Preview" when reading this information. These are restrictions that apply when you are using a printer in a network environment. Check the restrictions for the environment you are using. Restriction on setting up printer sharing • If "ntprint.inf" is requested when you install the driver from Add Printer, specify the file as follows: 1.
Uncheck Notify when remote documents are printed on the Advanced tab, and then restart the computer. • The bi-directional communication function is disabled and the correct printer status may not be recognized. If a client user opens the printer driver properties and then clicks OK with the Enable bidirectional support check box cleared on the Ports tab, the bidirectional communication function of the print server may also be disabled.
About the Administrator Password An administrator password "canon" is already specified for the printer at the time of purchase. Important • For security reasons, it is recommended to change the password before you use the printer. • You can change the password using one of the tools below. (Some tools may not be available depending on the printer you are using.
Printing Printing from a Computer Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Paper setting for Printing 388
Printing from a Computer Printing with Application Software that You are Using (Printer Driver) 389
Printing with Application Software that You are Using (Printer Driver) Printing with Easy Setup Basic Various Printing Methods Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data Overview of the Printer Driver Printer Driver Description Updating the MP Drivers 390
Printing with Easy Setup This section describes the simple procedure for setting the Quick Setup tab so that you can carry out appropriate printing on this printer. 1. Check that the printer is turned on 2. Load paper on the printer 3. Open the printer driver setup window 4. Select a frequently used profile In Commonly Used Settings on the Quick Setup tab, select a printing profile suited for the purpose.
Important • The print quality settings that can be selected may differ depending on a printing profile. 6. Select the paper source Select Cassette (Auto Select), Cassette 1, or Cassette 2 that matches your purpose for Paper Source. Important • The paper source settings that can be selected may differ depending on the paper type and size. 7.
Click OK. When you execute print, the document is printed with settings that match your purpose. Important • When you select the Always Print with Current Settings check box, all settings specified on the Quick Setup, Main, and Page Setup tabs are saved, and you can print with the same settings from the next time as well. • In the Commonly Used Settings window, click Save... to register the specified settings.
Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Media Type) When you use this printer, selecting a media type and paper size that matches the print purpose will help you achieve the best print results. You can use the following media types on this printer.
Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Paper Size) When you use this printer, selecting a paper size that matches the print purpose will help you achieve the best print results. You can use the following paper sizes on this printer. Printer Paper Size in the printer driver Cassette paper information registered on the printer Letter 8.5"x11" 22x28cm Letter Legal 8.
Various Printing Methods Setting a Page Size and Orientation Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order Setting the Stapling Margin Fit-to-Page Printing Scaled Printing Page Layout Printing Tiling/Poster Printing Booklet Printing Duplex Printing Stamp/Background Printing Registering a Stamp Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background Setting Up Envelope Printing Printing on Postcards Switching the Paper Source to Match the Purpose Displaying the Print Results before Printing Setting Paper Dimensi
Setting a Page Size and Orientation The paper size and orientation are essentially determined by the application software. When the page size and orientation set for Page Size and Orientation on the Page Setup tab are same as those set with the application software, you do not need to select them on the Page Setup tab.
Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order The procedure for specifying the number of copies and printing order is as follows: You can also set the number of copies on the Quick Setup tab. 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Specify the number of copies to be printed For Copies on the Page Setup tab, specify the number of copies to be printed. 3.
• Print from Last Page: /Collate: 4. Complete the setup Click OK. When you execute print, the specified number of copies will be printed with the specified printing order. Important • When the application software that you used to create the document has the same function, specify the settings on the printer driver. However, if the print results are not acceptable, specify the function settings on the application software.
Setting the Stapling Margin The procedure for setting the staple side and the margin width is as follows: 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Specify the side to be stapled Check the position of the stapling margin from Stapling Side on the Page Setup tab. The printer analyzes the Orientation and Page Layout settings, and automatically selects the best staple position. When you want to change the setting, select from the list. 3. Set the margin width If necessary, click Specify Margin...
Note • The printer automatically reduces the print area depending on the staple position margin. 4. Complete the setup Click OK on the Page Setup tab. When you execute print, the data is printed with the specified staple side and margin width. Important • Stapling Side and Specify Margin... appear grayed out and are unavailable when: • Tiling/Poster or Booklet is selected for Page Layout • Scaled is selected for Page Layout (When Duplex Printing is also selected, only Stapling Side can be specified.
Fit-to-Page Printing The procedure for printing a document that is automatically enlarged or reduced to fit the page size to be used is as follows: 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Set fit-to-page printing Select Fit-to-Page from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab. 3. Select the paper size of the document Using Page Size, select the page size that is set with your application software. 4.
5. Complete the setup Click OK. When you execute print, the document will be enlarged or reduced to fit to the page size.
Scaled Printing The procedure for printing a document with pages enlarged or reduced is as follows: 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Set scaled printing Select Scaled from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab. 3. Select the paper size of the document Using Page Size, select the page size that is set with your application software. 4.
• Specify a scaling factor Directly type in a value into the Scaling box. The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver. 5. Complete the setup Click OK. When you execute print, the document will be printed with the specified scale. Important • When the application software which you used to create the original has the scaled printing function, configure the settings on your application software.
Note • Selecting Scaled changes the printable area of the document.
Page Layout Printing The page layout printing function allows you to print more than one page image on a single sheet of paper. The procedure for performing page layout printing is as follows: 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Set page layout printing Select Page Layout from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab. The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver. 3.
Pages To change the number of pages to be printed on a single sheet of paper, select the number of pages from the list. Page Order To change the page arrangement order, select a placement method from the list. Page Border To print a page border around each document page, check this check box. 5. Complete the setup Click OK on the Page Setup tab. When you execute print, the specified number of pages will be arranged on each sheet of paper in the specified order.
Tiling/Poster Printing The tiling/poster printing function allows you to enlarge image data, divide it into several pages, and print these pages on separate sheets of paper. You can also paste the pages together to create a large print like a poster. The procedure for performing tiling/poster printing is as follows: Setting Tiling/Poster Printing 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Set tiling/poster printing Select Tiling/Poster from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab.
If necessary, click Specify..., specify the following settings in the Tiling/Poster Printing dialog box, and then click OK. Image Divisions Select the number of divisions (vertical x horizontal). As the number of divisions increases, the number of sheets used for printing increases. If you are pasting pages together to create a poster, increasing the number of divisions allows you to create a larger poster. Print "Cut/Paste" in margins To leave out words "Cut" and "Paste", uncheck this check box.
Note • Click the deleted pages to display them again. • Right-click the settings preview to select Print all pages or Delete all pages. 2. Complete the setup After completing the page selection, click OK. When you execute print, only specified pages will be printed. Important • Since tiling/poster printing enlarges the document when printing it, the print results may become coarse.
Booklet Printing The booklet printing function allows you to print data for a booklet. Data is printed on both sides of the paper. This type of printing ensures that pages can be collated properly, in page number order, when the printed sheets are folded and stapled at the center. The procedure for performing booklet printing is as follows: 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Set booklet printing Select Booklet from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab.
Margin for stapling Select which side should the stapling margin be on when the booklet is completed. Insert blank page To leave one side of a sheet blank, check the check box, and select the page to be left blank. Margin Enter the margin width. The specified width from the center of the sheet becomes the margin width for one page. Page Border To print a page border around each document page, check the check box. 5. Complete the setup Click OK on the Page Setup tab.
Duplex Printing The procedure for printing data on both sides of a sheet of paper is as follows: You can also set duplex printing in Additional Features on the Quick Setup tab. Performing Automatic Duplex Printing You can perform the duplex printing without having to turn over the paper. 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Set automatic duplex printing Check the Duplex Printing check box on the Page Setup tab and confirm that Automatic is checked. 3.
Use normal-size printing Print without reducing the page. Use reduced printing Reduce the page slightly during printing. 5. Specify the side to be stapled The best Stapling Side is selected automatically from the Orientation and Page Layout settings. To change the setting, select another stapling side from the list. 6. Set the margin width If necessary, click Specify Margin... and set the margin width, and then click OK. 7. Complete the setup Click OK on the Page Setup tab.
3. Select the layout Select Normal-size, Fit-to-Page, Scaled, or Page Layout from the Page Layout list. 4. Specify the side to be stapled The best Stapling Side is selected automatically from the Orientation and Page Layout settings. To change the setting, select another stapling side from the list. 5. Set the margin width If necessary, click Specify Margin... and set the margin width, and then click OK. 6. Complete the setup Click OK on the Page Setup tab.
Related Topic Changing the Printer Operation Mode 417
Stamp/Background Printing Stamp or Background may be unavailable when certain printer drivers or operating environments are used. The Stamp function allows you to print a stamp text or a bitmap over or behind document data. It also allows you to print date, time and user name. The Background function allows you to print a light illustration behind the document data.
3. Select a stamp Check the Stamp check box, and select the stamp to be used from the list. The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the Page Setup tab. 4. Set the stamp details If necessary, specify the following settings, and then click OK. Define Stamp... button To change the stamp text, bitmap, or position, click this. Place stamp over text To print the stamp on the front of the document, check this check box.
Select Background... button To use another background or change the layout or density of a background, click this. Background first page only To print the background only on the first page, check this check box. 5. Complete the setup Click OK on the Page Setup tab. When you execute print, the data is printed with the specified background. Note • The stamp and background are not printed on blank sheets inserted with the Insert blank page function of booklet printing.
Registering a Stamp This feature may be unavailable when certain printer drivers or operating environments are used. You can create and register a new stamp. You can also change and re-register some of the settings of an existing stamp. Unnecessary stamps can be deleted at any time. The procedure for registering a new stamp is as follows: Registering a New Stamp 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Click Stamp/Background... (Stamp...
4. Configure the stamp while viewing the preview window • Stamp tab Select Text, Bitmap, or Date/Time/User Name that matches your purpose for Stamp Type. ◦ For Text registration, the characters must already be entered in Stamp Text. If necessary, change the TrueType Font, Style, Size, and Outline settings. You can select the color of the stamp by clicking Select Color.... ◦ For Bitmap, click Select File... and select the bitmap file (.bmp) to be used.
6. Complete the setup Click OK. The Stamp/Background (Stamp) dialog box opens again. The registered title appears in the Stamp list. Changing and Registering Some of Stamp Settings 1. Select the stamp for which the settings are to be changed Select the Stamp check box in the Stamp/Background (Stamp) dialog box. Then from the list, select the title of the stamp to be changed. 2. Click Define Stamp... The Stamp Settings dialog box opens. 3. Configure the stamp while viewing the preview window 4.
Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background This feature may be unavailable when certain printer drivers or operating environments are used. You can select a bitmap file (.bmp) and register it as a new background. You can also change and register some of the settings of an existing background. An unnecessary background can be deleted. The procedure for registering image data to be used as a background is as follows: Registering New Background 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2.
4. Select the image data to be registered to the background Click Select File.... Select the target bitmap file (.bmp), and then click Open. 5. Specify the following settings while viewing the preview window Layout Method Select how the background image data is to be placed. When Custom is selected, you can set coordinates for X-Position and Y-Position. You can also change the background position by dragging the image in the preview window.
The Background Settings dialog box opens. 3. Specify each item on the Background tab while viewing the preview window 4. Save the background Click Save overwrite on the Save settings tab. When you want to save the background with a different title, enter a new title in the Title box and click Save. Click OK when the confirmation message appears. 5. Complete the setup Click OK, then it returns to Stamp/Background dialog box. The registered title appears in the Background list.
Setting Up Envelope Printing The procedure for performing envelope printing is as follows: 1. Load envelope on the printer 2. Open the printer driver setup window 3. Select the media type Select Envelope from Commonly Used Settings on the Quick Setup tab. 4. Select the paper size When the Envelope Size Setting dialog box is displayed, select Envelope Com 10, Envelope DL, Yougata 4 4.13"x9.25", or Yougata 6 3.86"x7.48", and then click OK. 5.
Important • When you execute envelope printing, guide messages are displayed. To hide the guide messages, check the Do not show this message again check box. To show the guide again, click the View Printer Status button on the Maintenance tab, and start the Canon IJ Status Monitor. Then click Envelope Printing from Display Guide Message of the Option menu to enable the setting.
Printing on Postcards This section describes the procedure for postcard printing. 1. Load postcard on the printer 2. Open the printer driver setup window 3. Select commonly used settings Display the Quick Setup tab, and for Commonly Used Settings, select Standard. 4. Select the media type For Media Type, select Hagaki A, Ink Jet Hagaki, Hagaki K, or Hagaki. Important • This printer cannot print on postcards that have photos or stickers attached.
Important • When you execute postcard printing, a guide message is displayed. When the guide message is displayed, select Do not show this message again if you do not want any guide messages to be displayed. To display guide messages again, open the Maintenance tab and click View Printer Status to start the Canon IJ Status Monitor. On the Option menu, choose Display Guide Message and click Hagaki Printing to enable the setting.
Switching the Paper Source to Match the Purpose In this printer, there are two paper sources, a cassette 1 and a cassette 2. You can facilitate printing by selecting a paper source setting that matches your media type or purpose. The procedure for setting paper source is as follows: You can also set the paper source on the Quick Setup tab. 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Select the media type Select the type of paper loaded in the printer from the Media Type list on the Main tab. 3.
4. Complete the setup Click OK. When you execute print, the printer uses the specified paper source to print the data. Note • If the paper settings on the printer driver differ from the cassette paper information registered on the printer, an error may occur. For instructions on what to do if an error occurs, see "Paper setting for Printing.
Displaying the Print Results before Printing If you are using the XPS printer driver, replace "Canon IJ Preview" with "Canon IJ XPS Preview" when reading this information. You can display and check the print result before printing. The procedure for displaying the print result before printing is as follows: You can also set the print results display on the Quick Setup tab. 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Set the preview Check the Preview before printing check box on the Main tab. 3.
Setting Paper Dimensions (Custom Size) You can specify the height and width of paper when its size cannot be selected from the Page Size. Such a paper size is called "custom size." The procedure for specifying a custom size is as follows: You can also set a custom size in Printer Paper Size on the Quick Setup tab. 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Select the paper size Select Custom... for Page Size on the Page Setup tab. The Custom Paper Size dialog box opens. 3.
Important • If the application software that created the document has a function for specifying height and width values, use the application software to set the values. If the application software does not have such a function or if the document does not print correctly, perform the above procedure from the printer driver to set the values. • Printing may be disabled depending on the size of the specified user-defined media.
Editing the Print Document or Reprinting from the Print History This function is unavailable when the standard IJ printer driver is used. In the Canon IJ XPS preview window, you can edit the print document or retrieve the document print history to print the document.
Editing and Printing a Print Document When printing multiple documents or pages, you can combine documents, change the print sequence of the documents or pages, or delete documents or pages. 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Set the preview Check the Preview before printing check box on the Main tab. 3. Complete the setup Click OK. The Canon IJ XPS Preview will start and the print result will be displayed before printing. 4.
After editing the print documents or print pages, you can change the print settings on the Page Information, Layout and Manual Color Adjustment tabs as necessary. Important • To display the multiple documents in the list, open the preview and execute print again. • To return the print documents to their original condition before they were edited in the preview, on the Edit menu, select Reset Documents from Documents.
Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data Printing a Color Document in Monochrome Specifying Color Correction Optimal Photo Printing of Image Data Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver Printing with ICC Profiles Adjusting Color Balance Adjusting Color Balance Using Sample Patterns (Printer Driver) Adjusting Brightness Adjusting Intensity Adjusting Contrast Adjusting Intensity/Contrast Using Sample Patterns (Printer Driver) 439
Printing a Color Document in Monochrome The procedure for printing a color document in monochrome is as follows: You can also set a grayscale printing in Additional Features on the Quick Setup tab. 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Set grayscale printing Check the Grayscale Printing check box on the Main tab. 3. Complete the setup Click OK. When you execute print, the document is converted to grayscale data. It allows you to print the color document in monochrome.
Note • During Grayscale Printing, inks other than black ink may be used as well.
Specifying Color Correction You can specify the color correction method suited to the type of document to be printed. Normally, the printer driver adjusts the colors by using Canon Digital Photo Color so that data is printed with color tints that most people prefer. This method is suitable for printing sRGB data. When you want to print by using the color space (Adobe RGB or sRGB) of the image data effectively, select ICM (ICC Profile Matching).
Driver Matching With Canon Digital Photo Color, you can print sRGB data with color tints that most people prefer. ICM (ICC Profile Matching) Adjusts the colors by using an ICC profile when printing. Specify the input profile to be used. None The printer driver does not perform color correction. Select this value when you are specifying an individually created printing ICC profile in an application software to print data. 4. Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab.
Optimal Photo Printing of Image Data When people print images taken with digital cameras, they sometimes feel that the printed color tones differ from those of actual image or those displayed on the monitor. To get the print results as close as possible to the desired color tones, you must select a printing method that is best suited to the application software used or to your purpose. Color Management Devices such as digital cameras, scanners, monitors, and printers handle color differently.
Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver You can specify the color correction function of the printer driver to print sRGB data with color tints that most people prefer through the use of Canon Digital Photo Color. When printing from an application software that can identify ICC profiles and allows you to specify them, use a printing ICC profile in the application software, and select settings for color management. The procedure for adjusting colors with the printer driver is as follows: 1.
Adjusting Intensity Adjusting Contrast 446
Printing with ICC Profiles When the image data has a specified input ICC profile, you can print by using the color space (Adobe RGB or sRGB) of the data effectively. The printer driver setting procedure varies depending on the application software used to print.
5. Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab. When you execute print, the printer uses the color space of the image data. Specify an ICC Profile with the Printer Driver, and then Print Print from an application software that cannot identify input ICC profiles or does allow you to specify one by using the color space of the input ICC profile (sRGB) found in the data.
Important • When the application software specifies an input profile, the input profile setting of the printer driver becomes invalid. • When no input ICC profiles are installed on your computer, Adobe RGB (1998) will not be displayed. 5. Set the other items If necessary, click Color Adjustment tab, and adjust Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Brightness, Intensity, and Contrast settings, and then click OK. 6. Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab.
Adjusting Color Balance You can adjust the color tints when printing. Since this function adjusts color balance of the output by changing the ink ratios of each color, it changes the total color balance of the document. Use the application software when you want to change the color balance significantly. Use the printer driver only when you want to adjust the color balance slightly.
There are individual sliders for Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow. Each color becomes stronger when the corresponding slider is moved to the right, and becomes weaker when the corresponding slider is moved to the left. For example, when cyan becomes weaker, the color red becomes stronger. You can also directly enter a value linked to the slider. Enter a value in the range from -50 to 50. The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver.
Adjusting Color Balance Using Sample Patterns (Printer Driver) You can look at the print results of pattern print and adjust the color balance. When you change the color balance or intensity/contrast of a document, the pattern print function prints the adjustment results in a list, together with the adjustment values. Described below is the procedure for adjusting the color balance while looking at the pattern. 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2.
4. Setting pattern print When the Pattern Print dialog box opens, set the following items, and then click OK. Parameters to Adjust Select Cyan/Magenta/Yellow. Important • When the Grayscale Printing check box on the Main tab is checked, Cyan/Magenta/Yellow appear grayed out and are unavailable. Printer Paper Size Select the paper size to be used for pattern printing. Note • Depending on the paper size selected on the Page Setup tab, there may be sizes that cannot be selected.
Note • Large is about double the size of Medium, and Small is about half the size of Medium. 5. Checking the print results of pattern print On the Color Adjustment tab, select OK to close the Manual Color Adjustment dialog box. On the Main tab, select OK, and then execute printing. The printer then prints a pattern in which the color balance that you set is the center value. 6. Adjusting the color balance Look at the print results and select the image that you like best.
Note • You can also set color balance on the Quick Setup tab by choosing Photo Printing under Commonly Used Settings, and then choosing Color/Intensity Manual Adjustment under Additional Features. 7. Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab. Then when you execute printing, the document is printed with the color balance that was adjusted by the pattern print function.
Adjusting Brightness You can change the brightness of the overall image data during printing. This function does not change pure white or pure black but it changes the brightness of the intermediate colors. The following sample shows the print result when the brightness setting is changed.
4. Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab. When you execute print, the data is printed at the specified brightness.
Adjusting Intensity You can dilute (brighten) or intensify (darken) the colors of the overall image data during printing. The following sample shows the case when the intensity is increased so that all colors become more intense when the image data is printed.
4. Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab. When you execute print, the image data is printed with the adjusted intensity.
Adjusting Contrast You can adjust the image contrast during printing. To make the differences between the light and dark portions of images greater and more distinct, increase the contrast. On the other hand, to make the differences between the light and dark portions of images smaller and less distinct, reduce the contrast.
After adjusting each color, click OK. 4. Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab. When you execute print, the image is printed with the adjusted contrast.
Adjusting Intensity/Contrast Using Sample Patterns (Printer Driver) You can look at the print results of pattern print and adjust the intensity/contrast. When you change the color balance or intensity/contrast of a document, the pattern print function prints the adjustment results in a list, together with the adjustment values. Described below is the procedure for adjusting the intensity/contrast while looking at the pattern. 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2.
4. Setting pattern print When the Pattern Print dialog box opens, set the following items, and then click OK. Parameters to Adjust Select Intensity/Contrast. Printer Paper Size Select the paper size to be used for pattern printing. Note • Depending on the paper size selected on the Page Setup tab, there may be sizes that cannot be selected. Amount of Pattern Instances Select Largest, Large, or Small to set the number of patterns to be printed.
On the Color Adjustment tab, select OK to close the Manual Color Adjustment dialog box. On the Main tab, select OK, and then execute printing. The printer then prints a pattern in which the intensity/contrast that you set is the center value. 6. Adjusting the intensity/contrast Look at the print results and select the image that you like best. Then enter the intensity/contrast numbers indicated at the bottom of that image into the Intensity and Contrast fields on the Color Adjustment tab.
Note • You can also set intensity/contrast on the Quick Setup tab by choosing Photo Printing under Commonly Used Settings, and then choosing Color/Intensity Manual Adjustment under Additional Features. 7. Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab. Then when you execute printing, the document is printed with the intensity/contrast that was adjusted by the pattern print function.
Overview of the Printer Driver Canon IJ Printer Driver How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window Canon IJ Status Monitor Checking the Ink Status from Your Computer Canon IJ Preview Deleting the Undesired Print Job Instructions for Use (Printer Driver) 466
Canon IJ Printer Driver The Canon IJ printer driver (called printer driver below) is a software that is installed on your computer for printing data with this printer. The printer driver converts the print data created by your application software into data that your printer can understand, and sends the converted data to the printer. Because different models support different print data formats, you need a printer driver for the specific model you are using.
How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window You can display the printer driver setup window from the application software in use or from the printer icon. Open the Printer Driver Setup Window through the Application Software Follow the procedure below to configure printing profile when printing. 1. Select the command that you perform printing on the application software In general, select Print on the File menu to open the Print dialog box. 2.
Canon IJ Status Monitor The Canon IJ Status Monitor is an application software that shows the status of the printer and the progress of printing. You will know the status of the printer with graphics, icons, and messages. Launching the Canon IJ Status Monitor The Canon IJ Status Monitor launches automatically when print data is sent to the printer. When launched, the Canon IJ Status Monitor appears as a button on the task bar. Click the button of the status monitor displayed on the task bar.
Checking the Ink Status from Your Computer You can check the remaining ink level and the ink tank types for your model. 1. Open the printer driver setup window 2. Launching the Canon IJ Status Monitor On the Maintenance tab, click View Printer Status. The Canon IJ Status Monitor opens and displays an image of the ink status. Note • The information displayed on the Canon IJ Status Monitor may differ depending on the country or region where you are using your printer. 3.
Canon IJ Preview The Canon IJ Preview is an application software that displays what the print result will look like before a document is actually printed. The preview reflects the information that is set within the printer driver and allows you to check the document layout, print order, and number of pages. You can also change the media type and paper source settings.
Deleting the Undesired Print Job If you are using the XPS printer driver, replace "Canon IJ Status Monitor" with "Canon IJ XPS Status Monitor" when reading this information. If the printer does not start printing, canceled or failed print job data may be remaining. Delete the undesired print job by using the Canon IJ Status Monitor. 1. Display the Canon IJ Status Monitor Click the icon of the Canon IJ Status Monitor displayed on the task bar. The Canon IJ Status Monitor appears. 2.
Instructions for Use (Printer Driver) This printer driver is subject to the following restrictions. Keep the following points in mind when using the printer driver. Restrictions on the Printer Driver • Depending on the document type to be printed, the paper feed method specified in the printer driver may not operate correctly. If this happens, open the printer driver setup window from the Print dialog box of the application software, and check the setting in the Paper Source field on the Main tab.
◦ When Page Size in Word is set to "XXX Enlarge/Reduce", the document may not print normally in certain versions of Word. If this happens, follow the procedure below. 1. Open Word's Print dialog box. 2. Open the printer driver setup window, and on the Page Setup tab, set Page Size to the same paper size that you specified in Word. 3. Set the Page Layout that you want, and then click OK to close the window. 4. Without starting printing, close the Print dialog box. 5. Open Word's Print dialog box again. 6.
Printer Driver Description Quick Setup tab Description Main tab Description Page Setup tab Description Maintenance tab Description Canon IJ Preview Description Canon IJ XPS Preview Description Canon IJ Status Monitor Description 475
Quick Setup tab Description The Quick Setup tab is for registering commonly used print settings. When you select a registered setting, the printer automatically switches to the preset items. Commonly Used Settings The names and icons of frequently used printing profiles are registered. When you select a printing profile according to the purpose of the document, settings that match the purpose are applied.
Envelope If you select this setting for printing an envelope, Media Type is set automatically to Envelope. In the Envelope Size Setting dialog box, select the size of the envelope to be used. Note • The combination of the Additional Features that was displayed for the printing profile that had been selected when the added printing profile was saved is also displayed when that added printing profile is selected. Save... Displays the Save Commonly Used Settings dialog box.
4-on-1 Printing Prints four pages of the document, side by side, on one sheet of paper. To change the page sequence, click the Page Setup tab, select Page Layout for Page Layout, and click Specify.... Then in the Page Layout Printing dialog box that appears, specify the Page Order. Duplex Printing Selects whether to print the document on both sides or one side of a sheet of paper. To change the staple side or the margins, set the new values from the Page Setup tab.
Print Quality Selects your desired printing quality. Select one of the following to set the print quality level that is appropriate for the purpose. High Gives priority to print quality over printing speed. Standard Prints with average speed and quality. Paper Source Select the source from which paper is supplied.
Name Enter the name for the printing profile you wish to save. Up to 255 characters can be entered. The name appears, with its associated icon, in the Commonly Used Settings list on the Quick Setup tab. Options... Opens the Save Commonly Used Settings dialog box. Changes the details of printing profile to be saved. Save Commonly Used Settings dialog box Select the icons of the printing profiles to be registered to Commonly Used Settings, and change the items to be saved in the printing profiles.
Related Topics Printing with Easy Setup Setting a Page Size and Orientation Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order Duplex Printing Setting Up Envelope Printing Printing on Postcards Switching the Paper Source to Match the Purpose Displaying the Print Results before Printing Setting Paper Dimensions (Custom Size) Printing a Color Document in Monochrome Specifying Color Correction Adjusting Color Balance Adjusting Color Balance Using Sample Patterns (Printer Driver) Adjusting Brightness Adjusting Int
Main tab Description The Main tab allows you to create a basic print setup in accordance with the media type. Unless special printing is required, normal printing can be performed just by setting the items on this tab. Settings Preview The paper illustration shows how the original will be laid out on a sheet of paper. You can check an overall image of the layout. The printer illustration shows how to load paper to match the printer driver settings.
Important • Depending on the Media Type settings, the same print results may be produced even if the Print Quality is changed. High Gives priority to print quality over printing speed. Standard Prints with average speed and quality. Color/Intensity Selects color adjustment method. Auto Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Brightness, Intensity, and Contrast, and so on are adjusted automatically. Manual Select when you set the individual settings such as Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Brightness, Intensity, and Contrast, etc.
status easily by changing the preview image to one similar to the results to be printed with Sample Type. Note • The graphic is in monochrome when the Grayscale Printing check box is checked. Sample Type Selects a preview image displayed on the Color Adjustment tab. If necessary, select a preview image from Standard, Portrait, Landscape, or Graphics, whichever is most similar to the print results. View Color Pattern Displays a pattern for checking color changes produced by color adjustment.
Pattern Print dialog box Performs the setup for printing of patterns that allow you to check the color balance and intensity/ contrast of documents. Parameters to Adjust Select the item to be checked by pattern printing. Cyan/Magenta/Yellow Prints a pattern that allows you to check the cyan/magenta/yellow balance. Important • When Grayscale Printing is checked on the Main tab, Cyan/Magenta/Yellow appear grayed out and are unavailable.
Matching Tab Allows you to select the method for adjusting colors to match the type of document to be printed. Color Correction Allows you to select Driver Matching, ICM (ICC Profile Matching), or None to match the purpose of the print operation. Important • When Grayscale Printing is checked on the Main tab, Color Correction appears grayed out and is unavailable. Driver Matching With Canon Digital Photo Color, you can print sRGB data with color tints that most people prefer.
Printing a Color Document in Monochrome Displaying the Print Results before Printing 487
Page Setup tab Description The Page Setup tab allows you to determine how a document is to be arranged on the paper. Also, this tab allows you to set the number of copies and the order of printing. If the application which created the document has a similar function, set them with the application. Settings Preview The paper illustration shows how the original will be laid out on a sheet of paper. You can check an overall image of the layout.
Rotate 180 degrees Prints the document by rotating it 180 degrees against the paper feed direction. The width of print area and the amount of extension that are configured in other application software will be reversed vertically and horizontally. Printer Paper Size Selects the size of paper actually loaded into the printer. The default setting is Same as Page Size to perform normal-sized printing.
Duplex Printing Selects whether to print the document automatically on both sides or one side of a sheet of paper. Check this check box to print the document on both sides. This function can be used only when Plain Paper is selected for Media Type and one of Normal-size, Fit-to-Page, Scaled, or Page Layout is selected. Automatic Selects whether duplex printing is to be performed automatically or manually.
Stamp/Background... (Stamp...) Opens the Stamp/Background (Stamp) dialog box. The Stamp function allows you to print a stamp text or a bitmap over or behind document data. It also allows you to print date, time and user name. The Background function allows you to print a light illustration behind the document data. Note • With the XPS printer driver, the Stamp/Background... button has become the Stamp... button and only the stamp function can be used.
Image Divisions Select the number of divisions (vertical x horizontal). As the number of divisions increases, the number of sheets used for printing increases. If you are pasting pages together to create a poster, increasing the number of divisions allows you to create a larger poster. Print "Cut/Paste" in margins Specifies whether to print the words "Cut" and "Paste" in the margins. These words serve as guidelines for pasting together the pages into a poster. Check this check box to print the words.
Print Area Setup dialog box When you perform duplex printing, the print area of the document becomes slightly narrower than usual. Therefore when a document that has small margins is printed, the document may not fit on one page. This dialog box allows you to set whether the page is to be reduced when printed so that the document fits in one page. Use normal-size printing Prints the document pages without reducing them. This is the default setting.
Important • Even when this check box is checked, only some of the information in the color profile is disabled, and the color profile can still be used for printing. • Uncheck this check box under normal circumstances. Disable the paper source setting of the application software Disables the paper feeding method that is set by the application. With some applications such as Microsoft Word, the data may be printed with a feeding method that differs from the printer driver setting.
Note • Scale images using nearest-neighbor interpolation can be used only with the XPS printer driver. Prevention of Print Data Loss You can reduce the size of the print data that was created with the application software and then print the data. Depending on the application software being used, the image data may be cut off or may not be printed properly. In such cases, select On. If you will not be using this function, select Off.
Print semitransparent stamp Sets how the stamp is to be printed over the document. Check the Stamp check box to enable this. Check this check box to print a semi-transparent stamp over the printed document page. Uncheck this check box to print the stamp over the document data. The printed data may be hidden behind the stamp. Note • You can use Print semitransparent stamp only with the XPS printer driver.
TrueType Font Selects the font for the stamp text string. Style Selects the font style for the stamp text string. Size Selects the font size for the stamp text string. Outline Selects a frame that encloses the stamp text string. If a large font size is selected for Size, characters may extend outside of the stamp border. Color/Select Color... Shows the current color for the stamp. To select a different color, click Select Color...
Note • Orientation is enabled only when Text or Date/Time/User Name is selected for Stamp Type on the Stamp tab. Note • Click Defaults to set the stamp position to Center and the orientation to 0. Save settings Tab The Save settings tab allows you to register a new stamp or delete an unnecessary stamp. Title Enter the title to save the stamp you created. Up to 64 characters can be entered. Note • Spaces, tabs, and returns cannot be entered at the beginning or end of a title.
Note • Depending on the type of printer driver you are using and the environment, this function may not be available. • Click Defaults to set File to blank, Layout Method to Fill page, and the Intensity slider to the middle. Save settings Tab The Save settings tab allows you to register a new background or delete an unnecessary background. Title Enter the title to save the background image you specified. Up to 64 characters can be entered.
Maintenance tab Description The Maintenance tab allows you to perform printer maintenance or change the settings of the printer. Cleaning Performs print head cleaning. Print head cleaning removes any blockage in the print head nozzles. Perform cleaning when printing becomes faint, or a specific color fails to print, even though all ink levels are sufficiently high. Deep Cleaning Performs deep cleaning. Perform deep cleaning when two cleaning attempts do not resolve the print head problem.
Align the print head immediately after installing the print head. When you click Print Head Alignment, the Start Print Head Alignment dialog box is displayed. Nozzle Check Prints a nozzle check pattern. Perform this function if printing becomes faint or a specific color fails to print. Print a nozzle check pattern, and check whether the print head is working properly. If the print result for a specific color is fainted, or if there are any unprinted sections, click Cleaning to clean the print head.
Custom Settings Opens the Custom Settings dialog box. Perform this function to change the settings of this printer. Note • If the printer is off or if communication between the printer and the computer is disabled, an error message may appear because the computer cannot collect the printer status. If this happens, click OK to display the most recent settings specified on your computer. View Print History This function starts the Canon IJ XPS preview, and displays the print history.
Print Alignment Value Click this button to check the current setting value of the print head position. Prints the current setting value for the print head position. Print Head Alignment dialog box To adjust the print head position manually, click Align Print Head in the Start Print Head Alignment dialog box, and perform the operations instructed in the messages. The Print Head Alignment dialog box is then displayed. This dialog box allows you to check the printed pattern and adjust the print head position.
Important • You can set the quiet mode from the operation panel of the printer, the printer driver, or ScanGear (scanner driver). No matter how you use to set the quiet mode, the mode is applied when you perform operations from the operation panel of the printer or printing and scanning from the computer. Custom Settings dialog box When you click Custom Settings, the Custom Settings dialog box is displayed. If necessary, switch between various modes of printer operation.
Important • If the font for displaying the language of your choice is not installed in your system, the characters will be garbled.
Canon IJ Preview Description Canon IJ Preview is an application software that displays what the print result will look like before a document is actually printed. The preview reflects the information that is set within the printer driver and allows you to check the document layout, print order, and number of pages. You can also change the media type and paper source settings.
• If duplex printing manually has been set, the front pages which will be printed first are all displayed together, and then the back pages are displayed. First Page Displays the first page of the document. If the currently displayed page is the first page, this command is grayed out and cannot be selected. Previous Page Displays the page located before the currently displayed page. If the currently displayed page is the first page, this command is grayed out and cannot be selected.
Start Printing button Prints the documents selected in the document list. The printed documents are deleted from the list, and when all documents are printed, the Canon IJ XPS Preview closes. Cancel Printing button Ends the Canon IJ Preview, and cancels the printing of the document that is displayed on the preview screen. You can click this button while spooling. Print Page Information Screen Displays print setup information for each page at the left side of the preview screen.
Canon IJ XPS Preview Description Canon IJ XPS Preview is an application software that displays what the print result will look like before a document is actually printed. The preview reflects the information which is set within the printer driver and allows you to check the document layout, print order, and number of pages. The preview also allows you to edit the print document, edit the print pages, change the print settings, and perform other functions.
Important • If the limit on the number of registration is exceeded, the print history registrations are deleted starting from the oldest one. Add documents from history to the list Adds the document saved in the print history to the document list. Exit Ends the Canon IJ XPS Preview. The documents remaining in the document list will be deleted from the list. This command has the same function as the Exit in the print settings area. Edit Menu Selects the method for editing multiple documents or pages.
Delete Document Deletes the selected document from the document list. If the document list contains only one document, the document is grayed out and cannot be selected. This command has the same function as the (Delete Document) on the toolbar. Grayscale Printing Allows you to change the monochrome print settings. This command has the same functionality as the Grayscale Printing check box in the print settings area. Page Layout Printing... Opens the Page Layout Printing dialog box.
Move to Last Moves the currently selected page to the end of the document. If the currently selected page is the last page, this command is grayed out and cannot be selected. View Menu Selects the documents and pages to be displayed. Documents Use the following command to select the document to display. First Document Displays the first document in the document list. If the currently selected document is the first document, this command is grayed out and cannot be selected.
Page Selection... Displays the Page Selection dialog box. This command allows you to specify the page number of the page to be displayed. Zoom Menu Selects the ratio of the actual size printed on the paper to the preview display size. You can also select the ratio from the drop-down list box located on the toolbar. Whole Displays the entire page of data as one page. 50% Reduces the displayed data to 50% of the actual size to be printed. 100% Displays the data at the actual size to be printed.
(Combine Documents) Combines the documents selected in the document list into one document. If only one document is selected, this command is grayed out and cannot be selected. (Delete Document) Deletes the selected document from the document list. If the document list contains only one document, the document is grayed out and cannot be selected. (Reset Documents) Returns the document selected in the document list to their status before they were added to the Canon IJ XPS Preview.
Pages Displays the number of pages in the print document. Important • The number displayed in Pages and the output page count are different. • To check the output page count, check the status bar at the bottom of the preview window. Status Displays the status of the print documents. Documents that are undergoing data processing are displayed as Processing data. Important • Documents showing Processing data cannot be printed or edited. Wait until the data processing ends.
Important • When Grayscale Printing is checked, Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow appear grayed out and are unavailable. Brightness Selects the brightness of your print. Pure white and black will not change, but colors between white and black will change. Intensity Adjusts the overall intensity of your print. Moving the slider to the right increases the intensity, and moving the slider to the left decreases the intensity. You can also directly enter a value linked to the slider.
Canon IJ Status Monitor Description The Canon IJ Status Monitor displays the status of the printer and the printing progress. The monitor uses graphics, icons, and messages to let you know the printer status. Canon IJ Status Monitor Features The Canon IJ Status Monitor offers the following advantages: You can check the status of the printer on the screen. The status of the printer is shown on the screen in real time. You can check the printing progress of each printing document (print job).
Display Print Queue Shows the print window used to manage the print job that is being printed or being in the print queue. Cancel Printing Cancels the current print job. Important • The Cancel Printing button is enabled only while print data is being sent to the printer. Once the print data has been sent, the button is grayed out and becomes unavailable. Option Menu If you select Enable Status Monitor, when a printer related message is generated the Canon IJ Status Monitor starts.
Message (displayed at right) Shows information such as the ink status and ink colors with sentences. Ink Model Number Shows the ink tank types for your printer. Close Closes the Ink Details dialog box to return to Canon IJ Status Monitor. Help Menu When you select this menu item, the Help window for Canon IJ Status Monitor is displayed, and you can check the version and copyright information.
Updating the MP Drivers Obtaining the Latest MP Drivers Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers Before Installing the MP Drivers Installing the MP Drivers 520
Obtaining the Latest MP Drivers The MP Drivers include a printer driver, ScanGear (scanner driver), and fax driver. By updating the MP Drivers to the latest version of the MP Drivers, unresolved problems may be solved. You can access our website and download the latest MP Drivers for your model. Important • You can download the MP Drivers for free, but any Internet access charges incurred are your responsibility. • Before installing the latest MP Drivers, delete the previously installed version.
Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers The MP Drivers which you no longer use can be deleted. When deleting the MP Drivers, first exit all programs that are running. The procedure to delete the unnecessary MP Drivers is as follows: 1. Start the uninstaller • If you are using Windows 8.1 or Windows 8, from the Desktop charms, select Settings -> Control Panel -> Programs -> Programs and Features. From the program list, select "XXX MP Drivers" (where "XXX" is your model name) and then click Uninstall.
Before Installing the MP Drivers This section describes the items that you should check before installing the MP Drivers. You should also refer to this section if the MP Drivers cannot be installed. Checking the Printer Status • Turn off the printer. Checking the Personal Computer Settings • Terminate all running applications. • Log on as a user who has the administrator account. Important • Before installing the latest MP Drivers, delete the previously installed version.
Installing the MP Drivers You can access our web site through the Internet and download the latest MP Drivers and XPS printer driver for your model. The procedure for installing the downloaded MP Drivers is as follows: 1. Turn off the printer 2. Start the installer Double-click the icon of the downloaded file. The installation program starts. Important • In Windows 8.1, Windows 8, Windows 7, or Windows Vista, a confirmation/warning dialog box may appear when starting, installing or uninstalling software.
Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Printing Photo Data Printing Documents (PDF File) Saved on a USB Flash Drive 525
Printing Photo Data Printing Photographs Saved on a USB Flash Drive Setting Items for Photo Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Using Useful Display Functions 526
Printing Photographs Saved on a USB Flash Drive You can print the photograph saved on the USB flash drive easily. 1. Make sure that the machine is turned on. 2. Load photo paper. 3. Insert the USB flash drive into the USB flash drive port. Important • If you already insert the USB flash drive to save the received faxes automatically, you cannot print the photographs even when the USB flash drive which contains the photo data is set.
Tap near the center of the displayed photo to display menus. A. Total number of copies Total number of copies is displayed. When tapping, the Check total no. of copies screen is displayed and you can check the number of copies for each photo. On the Check total no. of copies screen, you can change the number of copies for each photo. B. Number of copies Tap to specify the number of copies. 1. Flick vertically to specify the number of copies. Tap to display the photo selection screen. 2.
For details: Using Useful Display Functions D. Settings Tap to display the Settings screen. You can change the settings of page size, media type, and print quality and so on. For details on the setting items: Setting Items for Photo Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine E. Zooming in Tap to zoom in on the photo. For details: Using Useful Display Functions F. Date specification Tap to select photo with specifying the date (last modified date of data).
For details: Using Useful Display Functions G. Multi display Tap to display the multiple photos at once. For details on the display method: Using Useful Display Functions 6. Press the Color button. The machine starts printing. Note • To cancel printing, press the Stop button. • While processing the print job, you can add the print job (Reserve photo print). Adding the Print Job Adding the Print Job You can add the print job (Reserve photo print) while printing photos.
2. Specify the number of copies for each photo. Note • While processing the print job, you cannot change the setting for Page size or Type on print settings confirmation screen. The setting is the same as the setting for the photo included in the print job. 3. Press the Color button. The reserved photo is printed next to the photo that has already been started printing. If you want to print more photos, operate from step 1 again.
Setting Items for Photo Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine You can specify the setting of page size, media type, photo fix and so on to print the photos saved on the USB flash drive. Flick vertically to display setting items, then tap the setting item to display the settings. Tap to specify the setting. Note • Some settings cannot be specified in combination with the other setting items or the print menus. If the setting which cannot be specified in combination is selected, touch screen.
Device user settings 533
Using Useful Display Functions You can display the multiple photos at once, specify the date (last modified date of data) to select photos, and switch the photo group. Viewing Multiple Photos to Select Photo Specifying Date to Select Photo Zooming in on the Photo Switching the Photo Group Viewing Multiple Photos to Select Photo The following screen is displayed by tapping on the photo selection screen. A. Tap the photo you want to print, the touch screen returns to single photo display. B.
The photos on date specified are displayed. Note • The date is displayed according to the settings of Date display format in Device user settings under Device settings under Setup. Device user settings Zooming in on the Photo The following screen is displayed by tapping on the photo selection screen. A. Tap to switch the display magnification. B. Drag to move the display position.
Printing Documents (PDF File) Saved on a USB Flash Drive You can print PDF files that are scanned using the operation panel of the machine, PDF files that are saved on the USB flash drive when receiving faxes, or PDF files that are made using Canon IJ Scan Utility (application software compatible with the machine) from the USB flash drive. Note • You can print PDF files from a USB flash drive which satisfy the following conditions.
The document list is displayed. Note • If both photo files and PDF files are saved on USB flash drive, the confirmation screen to select which file you print is displayed. Tap Print documents in the displayed screen. • If no printable document (PDF files) is saved on the USB flash drive, Data of supported types are not saved. is displayed on the touch screen. 5. Select the document to print. File name list Preview display A. Flick to display the name of documents, then tap document to print. B.
• Characters other than the machine name or IJ Scan Utility are displayed on Created with. • The PDF files made using application software other than Canon IJ Scan Utility (application software compatible with the machine) are not printable even if they are saved using Canon IJ Scan Utility. 6. Specify the settings as necessary. 1. Copies Specify the number of copies. 2. Page size Select the page size depending on the loaded paper. 3. Type (Media type) The paper type is set to Plain paper. 4.
Note • You can print up to 250 pages at a time. If you try to print more than 250 pages of a PDF file, The specified PDF file contains too many pages. The pages exceeding the number of printable pages will not be printed. Continue? is displayed on the touch screen. To start printing, tap Yes. If you need to print more than 250 pages of a PDF file, print them from a computer. • Depending on the PDF file, it may be printed rotated by 90 degrees.
Paper setting for Printing By registering the paper size and the media type loaded in the cassette, you can prevent the machine from misprinting by displaying the message before printing starts when the paper size or the media type of the loaded paper differs from the print settings. • When you load paper in the cassette: The screen to register the cassette paper information is displayed. Register the paper size and the media type according to the loaded paper.
◦ Paper setting for printing or copying: B5 ◦ Cassette paper information registered to the machine: A4 When you start printing or copying, a message is displayed. Confirm the message, then tap OK. When the screen to select the operation is displayed, select one of the operations below. Note • Depending on the setting, the choices below may not be displayed. Print with paper in cass. settings Select if you want to print on the paper loaded in the cassette without changing the paper settings.
• For details on the proper combination of paper settings you can specify by the printer driver or on the touch screen: Setting the Media Type with the Printer Driver and on the Printer Setting the Paper Size with the Printer Driver and on the Printer Cancel Cancels printing. Select when you change the paper settings specified for printing or copying. Change the paper settings, then try printing again. Note • You can disable the message which prevents misprinting.
Copying Making Copies Reducing or Enlarging a Copy Basic Two-Sided Copying About Special Copy Menu Copying Two Pages to Fit onto a Single Page Copying Four Pages to Fit onto a Single Page Collated Copying 543
Making Copies This section describes the procedure to copy with Copy. 1. Make sure that the machine is turned on. 2. Load paper. 3. Flick the HOME screen, then tap Copy. Using the Operation Panel The Copy standby screen is displayed. 4. Load the original document on the platen glass or in the ADF. 5. Specify the settings as necessary. A. The copy layout is displayed. Switch the layout (single-sided/2-on-1/two-sided). B. Tap to specify the number of copies. 1.
For details on the setting items: Setting Items for Copying E. Tap to preview an image of the printout on the preview screen. For details: Displaying the Preview Screen F. Tap to specify the page size. 6. Press the Color button for color copying, or the Black button for black & white copying. The machine starts copying. Remove the original on the platen glass or from the document output slot after copying is complete.
Adding the Copying Job (Reserve copy) • When the message informing you that the operation restriction is enabled, ask the administrator of the machine you are using. For details on the operation restriction of the machine: About the Machine Administration Adding the Copying Job (Reserve copy) If you load the original on the platen glass, you can add the copying job while printing (Reserve copy). The screen below is displayed when you can add the copying job.
Displaying the Preview Screen When is displayed on the Copy standby screen, tapping printout on the preview screen. allows you to preview an image of the Important • The preview screen is not available when you load the original in the ADF. • In the following conditions, is not displayed when the Copy standby screen is displayed. • 2-sided is selected for 2-sidedPrintSetting. • 2-on-1 copy or 4-on-1 copy is selected for Layout. • ON is selected for Collate.
D. Tap to specify the magnification. If you keep touching, the magnification is changed by 10 %. E. Tap to return to the Copy standby screen. F. The magnification currently specified is displayed. Tap to select Fit to page.
Setting Items for Copying The following screen is displayed by tapping Settings on the Copy standby screen. Flick to display setting items, then tap the setting item to display the settings. Tap to specify the setting. Note • Some settings cannot be specified in combination with the setting of other setting item or the copy menu. If the setting which cannot be specified in combination is selected, displayed on the touch screen. In this case, tap message, then change the setting.
When ON is selected, the intensity is adjusted automatically according to the originals loaded on the platen glass. B. Drag to specify the intensity. C. Tap to confirm the intensity setting. Note • When Auto is selected, load the original on the platen glass. 3. Page size Select the page size of the loaded paper. 4. Type (Media type) Select the media type of the loaded paper. 5. Paper src (Paper source) Select the cassette to feed paper.
10. Collate Select whether to obtain sorted printouts when making multiple copies of a multi-paged original. Collated Copying 11. Frame erase copy When copying thick originals such as books, you can make a copy without black margins around the image and gutter shadows.
Reducing or Enlarging a Copy You can specify the magnification optionally or select the preset-ratio copying or fit-to-page copying. The screen below is displayed when you tap Settings in the Copy standby screen and tap Magnif. to select the reduction/enlargement method. A. Tap to display the screen below. 1. Tap the numbers to specify the magnification. 2. Tap to confirm the magnification. B. Flick to specify the magnification. C. Tap to confirm the magnification.
You can select one of the preset ratios to reduce or enlarge copies. Select the appropriate ratio for size of original and page size. The setting in Magnif.: 70% A4->A5/86% A4->B5/94% A4->LTR/115% B5->A4/141% A5->A4/156% 5x7->LTR/183% 4x6->LTR Note • Some of the preset ratios are not available depending on the country or region of purchase. • Ratio specified copy You can specify the copy ratio as a percentage to reduce or enlarge copies.
Two-Sided Copying When you select 2-sided for 2-sidedPrintSetting in Copy, you can copy two original pages onto the both sides of a single sheet of paper. In addition, when you select Duplex for ADF duplex scan, you can perform duplex scanning. Specify the place to load originals or copy settings according to the two-sided copying method.
• Two-sided to Single-sided Place to load the original: ADF ADF duplex scan: Duplex 2-sidedPrintSetting: 1-sided Note • When you tap Advanced after tapping Duplex for ADF duplex scan, you can select the orientation and the stapling side of the original.
◦ When you select Orientation: Landscape for the orientation and Original: Long side bind and Output: Long side bind for the stapling side: ◦ When you select Orientation: Landscape for the orientation and Original: Short side bind and Output: Short side bind for the stapling side: When the stapling sides specified for Duplex and 2-sided are different, the originals are copied so that the page is flipped vertically.
A. Tap to rotate the original by 180 degrees. B. Tap to start scanning the original. C. Tap to rescan the original. • After scanning: The screen below appears after scanning each sheet of original. A. Tap to start scanning the original. Remove the sheet of original from the platen glass after scanning and load the next sheet on the platen glass, then tap Scan. B. Tap to start copying the original already scanned. Note • You can add the copying job while printing.
About Special Copy Menu Copying Thick Originals Such as Books 558
Copying Thick Originals Such as Books When ON is selected for Frame erase copy in Copy, you can make a copy without black margins around the image and gutter shadows in copying thick originals such as books. Using this function, you can reduce unnecessary ink consumption. Note • When you use this function, load the original on the platen glass and close the document cover. • When the Copy standby screen is displayed, tapping on the preview screen.
Copying Two Pages to Fit onto a Single Page When you select 2-on-1 copy for Layout in Copy, you can copy two original pages onto a single sheet of paper by reducing each image. Tap Settings on the Copy standby screen to display the print settings screen, then select 2-on-1 copy for Layout. Select 2-on-1 copy, then tap OK. If you tap Advanced with 2-on-1 copy selected, you can specify the orientation and the order of the original.
Two-Sided Copying When Loading the Original on the platen glass: • Before scanning: When the preview function is activated, the machine starts pre-scanning before scanning the original. When pre-scanning is finished, the screen below (preview screen) is displayed on the LCD. A. Tap to rotate the original by 180 degrees. B. Tap to start scanning the original. C. Tap to rescan the original. • After scanning: The screen below appears after scanning each sheet of original. A.
Copying Four Pages to Fit onto a Single Page When you select 4-on-1 copy for Layout in Copy, you can copy four original pages onto a single sheet of paper by reducing each image. Four different layouts are available. Select 4-on-1 copy, then tap OK. If you tap Advanced with 4-on-1 copy selected, you can specify the orientation and the order of the original. Note • The order is the same regardless of the orientation.
After selecting the order, you can select whether you use the preview screen. If you tap ON, the preview screen is displayed so that you can check the orientation. Note • This function can be used in combination with Two-sided copy. If you use this function in combination, you can copy eight original pages on one sheet of paper. In this case, four original pages are copied on each side of paper.
B. Tap to start copying the original already scanned. Note • You can add the copying job while printing. Adding the Copying Job (Reserve copy) • If you use this function in combination with Two-sided copy, the screen above is displayed after scanning the fourth sheet of original is complete. Follow the on-screen instructions to scan the rest of originals.
Collated Copying You can obtain sorted printouts when making multiple copies of a multi-paged original. When you select ON for Collate in Copy, you can obtain sorted printouts when making multiple copies of a multi-paged original. In addition, you can copy originals on both sides of paper. • When ON is selected: • When OFF is selected: Note • When you use this function, load the original in the ADF. • This function can be used in combination with Two-sided copy.
See Two-Sided Copying for two-sided copying.
Scanning Scanning from a Computer Scanning from the Operation Panel of the Machine 567
Scanning from a Computer Scanning with IJ Scan Utility Scanning with Application Software that You are Using (ScanGear) Useful Information on Scanning IJ Network Scanner Selector EX Menu and Setting Screen Other Scanning Methods Placing Items (When Scanning from a Computer) 568
Scanning with IJ Scan Utility What Is IJ Scan Utility (Scanner Software)? Starting IJ Scan Utility Scanning Documents Basic Scanning Photos Scanning with Favorite Settings Scanning Items Larger than the Platen (Image Stitch) Extracting Text from Scanned Images (OCR) Sending Scanned Images via E-mail Scanning Multiple Items at One Time Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder) Scanning Both Sides of Each Document at One Time Saving after Checking Scan Results IJ Scan Utility
What Is IJ Scan Utility (Scanner Software)? IJ Scan Utility is an application that allows you to easily scan documents, photos, etc. You can complete from scanning to saving at one time by simply clicking the corresponding icon in the IJ Scan Utility main screen.
Note • Refer to "Settings Dialog Box" for how to set the applications to integrate with.
Starting IJ Scan Utility Note • If you have more than one scanner or have changed the connection from USB connection to network connection, set up the network environment from IJ Scan Utility. Network Scan Settings Follow the steps below to start IJ Scan Utility. Windows 8.1/Windows 8: Select IJ Scan Utility on the Start screen to start IJ Scan Utility. If IJ Scan Utility is not displayed on the Start screen, select the Search charm, then search for "IJ Scan Utility".
Scanning Documents You can scan items placed on the platen with settings suitable for documents. 1. Place the item on the platen. Placing Items (When Scanning from a Computer) 2. Start IJ Scan Utility. 3. Click Settings..., then set the paper size, resolution, etc. in the Settings (Document Scan) dialog box as required. When setting is completed, click OK. 4. Click Document. Scanning starts. Note • Click Cancel to cancel the scan.
Scanning Photos You can scan photos placed on the platen with settings suitable for photos. 1. Place the photo on the platen. Placing Items (When Scanning from a Computer) 2. Start IJ Scan Utility. 3. Click Settings..., then set the paper size, resolution, etc. in the Settings (Photo Scan) dialog box as required. When setting is completed, click OK. 4. Click Photo. Scanning starts. Note • Click Cancel to cancel the scan.
Scanning with Favorite Settings You can scan items placed on the platen with your favorite settings saved beforehand. This is convenient for saving frequently used settings or when specifying scan settings in detail. 1. Start IJ Scan Utility. 2. Click Settings..., then set the item type, resolution, etc. in the Settings (Custom Scan) dialog box as required. When setting is completed, click OK. Note • Once the settings are made, you can scan with the same settings from the next time. 3.
Scanning Items Larger than the Platen (Image Stitch) You can scan the left and right halves of an item larger than the platen and combine them back into one image. Items up to approximately twice as large as the platen are supported. Note • The following explains how to scan from the item to be placed on the left side. 1. Start IJ Scan Utility. 2. Click Settings..., then set the item type, resolution, etc. in the Settings (Scan and Stitch) dialog box as required. When setting is completed, click OK. 3.
5. Make sure that Scan from Left is selected in Scan Direction. 6. Place the item that is to be displayed on the left side of the screen face-down on the platen. 7. Click Start Scanning Image 1. The first item is scanned and appears in 1. Note • Click Cancel to cancel the scan.
8. Place the item that is to be displayed on the right side of the screen face-down on the platen. 9. Click Start Scanning Image 2. The second item is scanned and appears in 2. Note • Click Cancel to cancel the scan. 10. Adjust the scanned images as required. Use the Toolbar to rotate or zoom in/out, or drag the images to adjust their positions.
Note • Select the Adjust cropping frames checkbox to specify the area to be saved. Adjusting Cropping Frames in the Image Stitch Window • To scan an item again, select the image in the Preview area or the thumbnail at the top of the screen, then click (Delete). The selected image is deleted, allowing you to scan the item again. 11. Click Save. The combined image is saved. Note • Refer to "Image Stitch Window" for details on the Image Stitch window.
Extracting Text from Scanned Images (OCR) Click OCR in the IJ Scan Utility main screen to scan text in scanned magazines and newspapers and display it in a specified application. Note • You can also extract text from Document, Custom, or ScanGear. 1. Start IJ Scan Utility. 2. Click Settings..., then set the document type, resolution, etc. in the Settings (OCR) dialog box, and then select the application in which you want to display the result. When setting is completed, click OK.
• Documents with colors in the background of text • Documents containing multiple languages 581
Sending Scanned Images via E-mail You can send scanned images via e-mail easily by simply clicking E-mail in the IJ Scan Utility main screen. Note • You can also send scanned images via e-mail from Document, Photo, Custom, or ScanGear. 1. Start IJ Scan Utility. 2. Click Settings..., then set the item type, resolution, etc. in the Settings (E-mail) dialog box, and then select an e-mail client. When setting is completed, click OK. 3. Place the item on the platen.
Scanning Multiple Items at One Time You can scan two or more photos (small items) placed on the platen at one time and save each image individually. Important • The following types of items may not be scanned correctly. In that case, adjust the cropping frames (scan areas) in whole image view of ScanGear (scanner driver) and scan again. • • • • Photos that have a whitish background Items printed on white paper, hand-written documents, business cards, etc.
5. Select Select Source according to the items to be scanned. 6. Select Auto scan for Paper Size, then click OK.
The IJ Scan Utility main screen appears. Note • Refer to the following pages for details on the setting items in the Settings dialog box. Settings (Document Scan) Dialog Box Settings (Photo Scan) Dialog Box Settings (Custom Scan) Dialog Box Settings (OCR) Dialog Box Settings (E-mail) Dialog Box 7. Click Custom. Multiple items are scanned at one time. Note • Click Cancel to cancel the scan.
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder) Place multiple documents on the ADF (Auto Document Feeder) and scan at one time. This section explains how to scan one side of the documents at a time. To scan both sides of the documents automatically, refer to "Scanning Both Sides of Each Document at One Time". Note • You can scan multiple documents at one time from the ADF when scanning via Document, Custom, ScanGear, OCR, or E-mail.
5. Select Select Source according to the documents to be scanned. To scan only the front side of each document, select Document (ADF/Platen) or Document (ADF Simplex). To scan the front side then the back side of each document, select Document (ADF Manual Duplex). 6. Set the color mode, document size, and scanning resolution as required. Click Document Scan Orientation Settings... to specify the orientation of the documents to be scanned.
The IJ Scan Utility main screen appears. Note • Refer to the following pages for details on the setting items in the Settings dialog box. Settings (Document Scan) Dialog Box Settings (Custom Scan) Dialog Box Settings (OCR) Dialog Box Settings (E-mail) Dialog Box 7. Click Document. Scanning starts. Note • Click Cancel to cancel the scan. When Document (ADF Manual Duplex) is selected for Select Source, proceed to Step 8.
Note • When Document (ADF Duplex) is selected for Select Source, the Manual Duplex Scanning dialog box does not appear; both sides of the documents are scanned automatically. Refer to "Scanning Both Sides of Each Document at One Time" for details. 8. Follow the on-screen instructions to place the documents. Note • The screens for scanning with Orientation set to Portrait are used as examples in the following descriptions. When Long edge is Selected for Binding Side in Document Scan Orientation Settings...
9. Click OK. Scanning starts. Note • Click Cancel to cancel the scan. • Scanned images are saved in the folder set for Save in in the corresponding Settings dialog box displayed by clicking Settings.... In each Settings dialog box, you can also make advanced scan settings.
Scanning Both Sides of Each Document at One Time Scan both sides of each document at one time using the ADF (Auto Document Feeder). Note • You can scan multiple documents at one time from the ADF when scanning via Document, Custom, ScanGear, OCR, or E-mail. Refer to "Scanning with Application Software that You are Using (ScanGear)" for your model from Home of the Online Manual for how to scan using ScanGear (scanner driver).
5. Select Document (ADF/Platen) or Document (ADF Duplex) for Select Source. Note • Select the Scan both sides when scanning from the ADF checkbox in Scan Options when scanning via Document (ADF/Platen). 6. Set the color mode, document size, and scanning resolution as required. Click Document Scan Orientation Settings... to specify the orientation of the documents to be scanned. In the displayed dialog box, you can specify the Orientation and Binding Side.
When setting is completed, click OK. The IJ Scan Utility main screen appears. Note • Refer to the following pages for details on the setting items in the Settings dialog box. Settings (Document Scan) Dialog Box Settings (Custom Scan) Dialog Box Settings (OCR) Dialog Box Settings (E-mail) Dialog Box 7. Click Document. Both sides of the documents are scanned automatically. Note • Click Cancel to cancel the scan.
Saving after Checking Scan Results You can check the scan results, then save the images to a computer. Important • You cannot check the scan results before saving when scanned using the operation panel. Note • The screens for scanning photos are used as examples in the following descriptions. 1. Start IJ Scan Utility. 2. Click Settings.... The Settings dialog box appears. 3. Click Photo Scan. 4. Select the Check scan results checkbox, then click OK.
The IJ Scan Utility main screen appears. Note • Refer to the following pages for details on the setting items in the Settings dialog box. Settings (Document Scan) Dialog Box Settings (Photo Scan) Dialog Box Settings (Custom Scan) Dialog Box Settings (Scan and Stitch) Dialog Box Settings (ScanGear) Dialog Box Settings (OCR) Dialog Box Settings (E-mail) Dialog Box 5. Click Photo. Scanning starts. When scanning is completed, the Save Settings dialog box appears. Note • Click Cancel to cancel the scan.
6. Change the image order or file save options as required. You can change the image order or file save options in the Save Settings dialog box. Note • The default save folders are as follows. • Windows 8.1: Documents folder • Windows 8: My Documents folder • Windows 7: My Documents folder • Windows Vista: Documents folder • Windows XP: My Documents folder 7. Click OK. Scanned images are saved according to the settings.
IJ Scan Utility Screens IJ Scan Utility Main Screen Settings Dialog Box Settings (Document Scan) Dialog Box Settings (Photo Scan) Dialog Box Settings (Custom Scan) Dialog Box Settings (Scan and Stitch) Dialog Box Settings (ScanGear) Dialog Box Settings (OCR) Dialog Box Settings (E-mail) Dialog Box Settings (Save to PC (Photo)) Dialog Box Settings (Save to PC (Document)) Dialog Box Settings (Attach to E-mail (Photo)) Dialog Box Settings (Attach to E-mail (Document)) Dialog Box Settings (General Settings) Dia
IJ Scan Utility Main Screen Follow the steps below to start IJ Scan Utility. Windows 8.1 / Windows 8: Select IJ Scan Utility on the Start screen to start IJ Scan Utility. If IJ Scan Utility is not displayed on the Start screen, select the Search charm, then search for "IJ Scan Utility". Windows 7/Windows Vista/Windows XP: From the Start menu, select All Programs > Canon Utilities > IJ Scan Utility > IJ Scan Utility to start IJ Scan Utility.
Stitch Displays the Image Stitch window in which you can scan the left and right halves of an item larger than the platen and combine the scanned images back into one image. Scan/save settings and the response after scanning can be specified in the Settings (Scan and Stitch) dialog box. ScanGear Starts ScanGear (scanner driver) in which you can make image corrections and color adjustments when scanning. Scan/save settings and applications can be specified in the Settings (ScanGear) dialog box.
Settings Dialog Box There are three tabs in the Settings dialog box: (Scanning from a Computer), (Scanning from the Operation Panel), and (General Settings). When you click a tab, the view in the red frame switches and you can make advanced settings to functions on each tab. (Scanning from a Computer) Tab You can specify how to respond when scanning from IJ Scan Utility.
(Scanning from the Operation Panel) Tab You can specify how to respond when scanning from the operation panel. Settings (Save to PC (Photo)) Dialog Box Settings (Save to PC (Document)) Dialog Box Settings (Attach to E-mail (Photo)) Dialog Box Settings (Attach to E-mail (Document)) Dialog Box (General Settings) Tab You can set the product to use, file size restriction on e-mail attachment, language to detect text in images, and folder in which to save images temporarily.
Settings (Document Scan) Dialog Box Click Document Scan on the Scan) dialog box. (Scanning from a Computer) tab to display the Settings (Document In the Settings (Document Scan) dialog box, you can make advanced scan settings to scan items as documents. (1) Scan Options Area (2) Save Settings Area (3) Application Settings Area (1) Scan Options Area Select Source Select the type of item to be scanned.
Note • When Document (ADF/Platen) is selected and documents are placed both on the platen and ADF, those placed on the ADF will be scanned. Color Mode Select the color mode in which to scan the item. Paper Size Select the size of the item to be scanned. When scanning both sides of the documents automatically from the ADF, select A4 or Letter. When you select Custom, a screen in which you can specify the paper size appears. Select a Unit, then enter the Width and Height, and then click OK.
Important • Binding Side cannot be specified when scanning only the front side of each document. Scan both sides when scanning from the ADF This appears when you select Document (ADF/Platen) for Select Source. Scans both sides of the documents placed on the ADF. Image Processing Settings Click (Plus) to set the following. Note • The displayed items vary by Select Source and Color Mode. Apply Auto Document Fix Select this checkbox to sharpen text in a document or magazine for better readability.
Correct slanted text document Detects the scanned text and corrects the angle (within -0.1 to -10 degrees or +0.1 to +10 degrees) of the document. Important • The following types of documents may not be corrected properly since the text cannot be detected correctly.
The default save folders are as follows. • • • • • Windows 8.1: Documents folder Windows 8: My Documents folder Windows 7: My Documents folder Windows Vista: Documents folder Windows XP: My Documents folder Data Format Select the data format in which to save the scanned images. You can select JPEG/Exif, TIFF, PNG, PDF, or PDF (Multiple Pages). Important • You cannot select JPEG/Exif when Color Mode is Black and White.
Save to a subfolder with current date Select this checkbox to create a current date folder in the folder specified in Save in and save scanned images in it. The folder will be created with a name such as "20XX_01_01" (Year_Month_Date). If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in. Check scan results Displays the Save Settings dialog box after scanning.
Settings (Photo Scan) Dialog Box Click Photo Scan on the dialog box. (Scanning from a Computer) tab to display the Settings (Photo Scan) In the Settings (Photo Scan) dialog box, you can make advanced scan settings to scan items as photos. (1) Scan Options Area (2) Save Settings Area (3) Application Settings Area (1) Scan Options Area Select Source Photo is selected. Color Mode Select the color mode in which to scan the item. Paper Size Select the size of the item to be scanned.
Note • Click Defaults to restore the specified settings to the default settings. Resolution Select the resolution of the item to be scanned. The higher the resolution (value), the more detail in your image. Resolution Image Processing Settings Click (Plus) to set the following. Important • When Color Mode is Black and White, Image Processing Settings is not available. Sharpen outline Emphasizes the outline of the subjects to sharpen the image.
Important • You cannot select JPEG/Exif when Color Mode is Black and White. Note • With network connection, scanning may take longer than usual when you set TIFF or PNG in Data Format. JPEG Image Quality You can specify the image quality of JPEG files. Important • This appears only when JPEG/Exif is selected in Data Format. Save to a subfolder with current date Select this checkbox to create a current date folder in the folder specified in Save in and save scanned images in it.
Defaults You can restore the settings in the displayed screen to the default settings.
Settings (Custom Scan) Dialog Box Click Custom Scan on the dialog box. (Scanning from a Computer) tab to display the Settings (Custom Scan) In the Settings (Custom Scan) dialog box, you can make advanced scan settings to scan according to your preference. (1) Scan Options Area (2) Save Settings Area (3) Application Settings Area (1) Scan Options Area Select Source Select the type of item to be scanned.
• A4 size photos • Text documents smaller than 2L (5 inches x 7 inches) (127 mm x 178 mm), such as paperback pages with the spine cut off • Items printed on thin white paper • Long narrow items such as panoramic photos • Reflective disc labels may not be scanned as expected. • Place items correctly according to the type of item to be scanned. Otherwise, items may not be scanned correctly. Refer to "Placing Items (When Scanning from a Computer)" for how to place items.
Note • Only Auto is available when Select Source is Auto. • Only 300 dpi or 400 dpi can be set when Start OCR is selected in Application Settings. Document Scan Orientation Settings... This appears when you select ADF or Auto for Select Source. Click to display the Document Scan Orientation Settings dialog box in which you can set the orientation and binding side of the documents to be scanned from the ADF. Important • Binding Side cannot be specified when scanning only the front side of each document.
• When Select Source is Magazine or Document: Note • The displayed items vary by Select Source and Color Mode. Apply Auto Document Fix Select this checkbox to sharpen text in a document or magazine for better readability. Important • The color tone may differ from the source image due to corrections. In that case, deselect the checkbox and scan. Note • Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable this function. Sharpen outline Emphasizes the outline of the subjects to sharpen the image.
• Documents in which the text lines are inclined more than 10 degrees or the angles vary by line • Documents containing both vertical and horizontal text • Documents with extremely large or small fonts • • • • Documents with small amount of text Documents containing figures/images Hand-written text Documents containing both vertical and horizontal lines (tables) Note • Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable Correct slanted text document.
Data Format Select the data format in which to save the scanned images. You can select JPEG/Exif, TIFF, PNG, PDF, PDF (Multiple Pages), or Auto. Important • You cannot select JPEG/Exif when Color Mode is Black and White. • When Start OCR is selected in Application Settings, you cannot select PDF or PDF (Multiple Pages). Note • Auto appears only when Auto is selected for Select Source. • With network connection, scanning may take longer than usual when you set TIFF or PNG in Data Format.
Important • This does not appear when Select Source is Auto. (3) Application Settings Area Open with an application Select this when you want to enhance or correct the scanned images. You can specify the application from the pull-down menu. Send to an application Select this when you want to use the scanned images as they are in an application that allows you to browse or organize images. You can specify the application from the pull-down menu.
Settings (Scan and Stitch) Dialog Box Click Scan and Stitch on the Stitch) dialog box. (Scanning from a Computer) tab to display the Settings (Scan and In the Settings (Scan and Stitch) dialog box, you can make advanced scan settings for scanning items larger than the platen. (1) Scan Options Area (2) Save Settings Area (3) Application Settings Area (1) Scan Options Area Select Source Select the type of item to be scanned.
The higher the resolution (value), the more detail in your image. Resolution Image Processing Settings Click (Plus) to set the following. Available setting items vary by Select Source. Important • When Color Mode is Black and White, Image Processing Settings is not available. • When Select Source is Photo: Sharpen outline Emphasizes the outline of the subjects to sharpen the image. • When Select Source is Magazine or Document: Sharpen outline Emphasizes the outline of the subjects to sharpen the image.
Data Format Select the data format in which to save the scanned images. You can select JPEG/Exif, TIFF, PNG, PDF, or PDF (Multiple Pages). Important • You cannot select JPEG/Exif when Color Mode is Black and White. Note • With network connection, scanning may take longer than usual when you set TIFF or PNG in Data Format. PDF Compression Select the compression type for saving PDF files. Standard It is recommended that you normally select this setting.
(3) Application Settings Area Open with an application Select this when you want to enhance or correct the scanned images. You can specify the application from the pull-down menu. Send to an application Select this when you want to use the scanned images as they are in an application that allows you to browse or organize images. You can specify the application from the pull-down menu.
Settings (ScanGear) Dialog Box Click ScanGear on the box. (Scanning from a Computer) tab to display the Settings (ScanGear) dialog In the Settings (ScanGear) dialog box, you can specify how to save images when scanning items by starting ScanGear (scanner driver) and how to respond after saving them. (1) Save Settings Area (2) Application Settings Area (1) Save Settings Area File Name Enter the file name of the image to be saved.
• Windows XP: My Documents folder Data Format Select the data format in which to save the scanned images. You can select JPEG/Exif, TIFF, PNG, PDF, or PDF (Multiple Pages). Note • When PDF or PDF (Multiple Pages) is selected, images up to 9600 pixels x 9600 pixels can be scanned. • When the Enable large image scans checkbox is selected in Save Settings, or when Start OCR is selected in Application Settings, you can select JPEG/Exif, TIFF, or PNG.
Important • When this checkbox is selected, you cannot select Send to an application, Send to a folder, Attach to e-mail, or Start OCR. Note • When this checkbox is not selected, images up to 10208 pixels x 14032 pixels can be scanned. Check scan results Displays the Save Settings dialog box after scanning. (2) Application Settings Area Open with an application Select this when you want to enhance or correct the scanned images. You can specify the application from the pull-down menu.
Settings (OCR) Dialog Box Click OCR on the (Scanning from a Computer) tab to display the Settings (OCR) dialog box. In the Settings (OCR) dialog box, you can make advanced settings for extracting text from scanned images. (1) Scan Options Area (2) Save Settings Area (3) Application Settings Area (1) Scan Options Area Select Source Select the type of item to be scanned.
When you select Custom, a screen in which you can specify the paper size appears. Select a Unit, then enter the Width and Height, and then click OK. Important • Custom cannot be selected depending on the Select Source setting. Note • Click Defaults to restore the specified settings to the default settings. Resolution Select the resolution of the item to be scanned. The higher the resolution (value), the more detail in your image. Resolution Note • For Resolution, only 300 dpi or 400 dpi can be set.
Image Processing Settings Click (Plus) to set the following. Note • The displayed items vary by Select Source and Color Mode. Apply Auto Document Fix Select this checkbox to sharpen text in a document or magazine for better readability. Important • The color tone may differ from the source image due to corrections. In that case, deselect the checkbox and scan. Note • Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable this function.
• Documents in which the text lines are inclined more than 10 degrees or the angles vary by line • Documents containing both vertical and horizontal text • Documents with extremely large or small fonts • • • • Documents with small amount of text Documents containing figures/images Hand-written text Documents containing both vertical and horizontal lines (tables) Note • Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable Correct slanted text document.
Data Format Select the data format in which to save the scanned images. You can select JPEG/Exif, TIFF, or PNG. Important • You cannot select JPEG/Exif when Color Mode is Black and White. Note • With network connection, scanning may take longer than usual when you set TIFF or PNG in Data Format. JPEG Image Quality You can specify the image quality of JPEG files. Important • This appears only when JPEG/Exif is selected in Data Format.
Settings (E-mail) Dialog Box Click E-mail on the (Scanning from a Computer) tab to display the Settings (E-mail) dialog box. In the Settings (E-mail) dialog box, you can specify how to respond when attaching images to an e-mail after scanning them using the scanner button. (1) Scan Options Area (2) Save Settings Area (3) Application Settings Area (1) Scan Options Area Select Source Select the type of item to be scanned.
• Place items correctly according to the type of item to be scanned. Otherwise, items may not be scanned correctly. Refer to "Placing Items (When Scanning from a Computer)" for how to place items. • When scanning both sides of the documents from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder), you can scan A4 or Letter size documents. • When scanning two or more documents from the ADF, place documents of the same size even if Auto is set. Note • To reduce moire, set Select Source to Magazine.
Important • Binding Side cannot be specified when scanning only the front side of each document. Scan both sides when scanning from the ADF This appears when you select Auto for Select Source. Scans both sides of the documents placed on the ADF. Image Processing Settings Click (Plus) to set the following. Available setting items vary by Select Source. • When Select Source is Auto: Apply recommended image correction Applies suitable corrections automatically based on the item type.
Important • The color tone may differ from the source image due to corrections. In that case, deselect the checkbox and scan. Note • Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable this function. Sharpen outline Emphasizes the outline of the subjects to sharpen the image. Reduce show-through Sharpens text in an item or reduces show-through in newspapers, etc. Reduce moire Reduces moire patterns. Printed materials are displayed as a collection of fine dots.
• Documents containing both vertical and horizontal lines (tables) Note • Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable Correct slanted text document. Detect the orientation of text document and rotate image Automatically rotates the image to the correct orientation by detecting the orientation of text in the scanned document. Important • Only text documents written in languages that can be selected from Document Language in the Settings (General Settings) dialog box are supported.
Note • Auto appears only when Auto is selected for Select Source. • With network connection, scanning may take longer than usual when you set TIFF or PNG in Data Format. JPEG Image Quality You can specify the image quality of JPEG files. Important • This appears only when JPEG/Exif or Auto is selected in Data Format. PDF Compression Select the compression type for saving PDF files. Standard It is recommended that you normally select this setting.
Note • You can add e-mail clients from Add in the Select Application dialog box displayed by selecting Add... from the pull-down menu. Instructions Opens this guide. Defaults You can restore the settings in the displayed screen to the default settings.
Settings (Save to PC (Photo)) Dialog Box Click Save to PC (Photo) on the (Save to PC (Photo)) dialog box. (Scanning from the Operation Panel) tab to display the Settings In the Settings (Save to PC (Photo)) dialog box, you can specify how to respond when saving images to a computer as photos after scanning them from the operation panel. (1) Scan Options Area (2) Save Settings Area (3) Application Settings Area (1) Scan Options Area Paper Size Set from the operation panel.
Save in Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images. To change the folder, specify the destination folder in the Select Destination Folder dialog box displayed by selecting Add... from the pull-down menu. The default save folders are as follows. • • • • • Windows 8.1: Documents folder Windows 8: My Documents folder Windows 7: My Documents folder Windows Vista: Documents folder Windows XP: My Documents folder Data Format Set from the operation panel.
Settings (Save to PC (Document)) Dialog Box Click Save to PC (Document) on the (Save to PC (Document)) dialog box. (Scanning from the Operation Panel) tab to display the Settings In the Settings (Save to PC (Document)) dialog box, you can specify how to respond when saving images to a computer as documents after scanning them from the operation panel. (1) Scan Options Area (2) Save Settings Area (3) Application Settings Area (1) Scan Options Area Paper Size Set from the operation panel.
Note • Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable this function. Reduce gutter shadow (platen) Reduces gutter shadows that appear between pages when scanning open booklets. Important • This function is available only when scanning from the platen. Note • When you enable this function, scanning may take longer than usual with network connection. Correct slanted text document Detects the scanned text and corrects the angle (within -0.1 to -10 degrees or +0.1 to +10 degrees) of the document.
(2) Save Settings Area File Name Enter the file name of the image to be saved. When you save a file, the date and four digits are appended to the set file name in the "_20XX0101_0001" format. Note • When you select the Save to a subfolder with current date checkbox, the date and four digits are appended to the set file name. Save in Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images.
Send to a folder Select this when you also want to save the scanned images to a folder other than the one specified in Save in. You can specify the folder from the pull-down menu. Do not start any application Saves to the folder specified in Save in. Note • Specify the application or folder in the Select Application or Select Destination Folder dialog box displayed by selecting Add... from the pull-down menu. Instructions Opens this guide.
Settings (Attach to E-mail (Photo)) Dialog Box Click Attach to E-mail (Photo) on the (Attach to E-mail (Photo)) dialog box. (Scanning from the Operation Panel) tab to display the Settings In the Settings (Attach to E-mail (Photo)) dialog box, you can specify how to respond when attaching images to an e-mail as photos after scanning them from the operation panel. (1) Scan Options Area (2) Save Settings Area (3) Application Settings Area (1) Scan Options Area Paper Size Set from the operation panel.
Save in Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images. To change the folder, specify the destination folder in the Select Destination Folder dialog box displayed by selecting Add... from the pull-down menu. The default save folders are as follows. • • • • • Windows 8.1: Documents folder Windows 8: My Documents folder Windows 7: My Documents folder Windows Vista: Documents folder Windows XP: My Documents folder Data Format Set from the operation panel.
Settings (Attach to E-mail (Document)) Dialog Box Click Attach to E-mail (Document) on the (Scanning from the Operation Panel) tab to display the Settings (Attach to E-mail (Document)) dialog box. In the Settings (Attach to E-mail (Document)) dialog box, you can specify how to respond when attaching images to an e-mail as documents after scanning them from the operation panel.
Reduce gutter shadow (platen) Reduces gutter shadows that appear between pages when scanning open booklets. Important • This function is available only when scanning from the platen. Note • When you enable this function, scanning may take longer than usual with network connection. Correct slanted text document Detects the scanned text and corrects the angle (within -0.1 to -10 degrees or +0.1 to +10 degrees) of the document.
Note • When you select the Save to a subfolder with current date checkbox, the date and four digits are appended to the set file name. Save in Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images. To change the folder, specify the destination folder in the Select Destination Folder dialog box displayed by selecting Add... from the pull-down menu. The default save folders are as follows. • • • • • Windows 8.
Settings (General Settings) Dialog Box Click the (General Settings) tab to display the Settings (General Settings) dialog box. In the Settings (General Settings) dialog box, you can set the product to use, file size restriction on e-mail attachment, language to detect text in images, and folder in which to save images temporarily. Product Name Displays the name of the product that IJ Scan Utility is currently set to use.
Save Settings Dialog Box Select the Check scan results checkbox in Save Settings of the Settings dialog box to display the Save Settings dialog box after scanning. You can specify the data format and destination while viewing the thumbnails of scan results. (1) Preview Operation Buttons (2) Scan Results Area (3) Save Settings Area (1) Preview Operation Buttons / (Rotate Left 90°)/(Rotate Right 90°) Rotates scanned images 90 degrees counter-clockwise or clockwise.
(3) Save Settings Area File Name Enter the file name of the image to be saved. When you save a file, the date and four digits are appended to the set file name in the "_20XX0101_0001" format. Note • When you select the Save to a subfolder with current date checkbox, the date and four digits are appended to the set file name. Save in Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images.
Important • This appears only when PDF or PDF (Multiple Pages) is selected in Data Format. • When Black and White is selected in Color Mode, this option does not appear. Create a PDF file that supports keyword search Select this checkbox to convert text in images into text data and create PDF files that support keyword search. Important • This appears only when PDF or PDF (Multiple Pages) is selected in Data Format.
Image Stitch Window Click Stitch in the IJ Scan Utility main screen to display the Image Stitch window. You can scan the left and right halves of an item larger than the platen and combine them back into one image. You can scan items up to approximately twice as large as the platen. (1) Settings and Operation Buttons (2) Toolbar (3) Thumbnail View Area (4) Preview Area Note • The displayed items vary depending on the select source and view.
Scan Image 1 Start Scanning Image 1 Scans the first item. Scan Image 2 Start Scanning Image 2 Scans the second item. Adjust cropping frames You can adjust the scan area in preview. If no area is specified, the image of the size selected in Select Output Size will be saved. If an area is specified, only the image in the cropping frame will be scanned and saved. Adjusting Cropping Frames in the Image Stitch Window Save Save Saves the two scanned images as one image.
Cancel Cancels Stitch scan. (2) Toolbar You can delete the scanned images or adjust the previewed images. (Delete) Deletes the scanned image. (Enlarge/Reduce) Allows you to enlarge or reduce the preview image. Left-clicking the Preview area enlarges the displayed image. Right-clicking the Preview area reduces the displayed image. (Rotate Left) Rotates the preview image 90 degrees counter-clockwise. (Invert Vertically) Rotates the preview image 180 degrees.
When no image has been scanned: After scanning the first item by clicking Start Scanning Image 1: The image is scanned in the direction specified in Scan Direction, and 2 appears next to it. After scanning the second item by clicking Start Scanning Image 2: The two scanned images appear.
Related Topic Scanning Items Larger than the Platen (Image Stitch) 657
Scanning with Application Software that You are Using (ScanGear) What Is ScanGear (Scanner Driver)? Scanning with Advanced Settings Using ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Scanning in Basic Mode Scanning in Advanced Mode Scanning Multiple Documents from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder) in Advanced Mode Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with ScanGear (Scanner Driver) ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens Placing
What Is ScanGear (Scanner Driver)? ScanGear (scanner driver) is software required for scanning documents. It enables you to specify the output size and make image corrections when scanning. ScanGear can be started from IJ Scan Utility or applications that are compatible with a standard interface called TWAIN. (ScanGear is a TWAIN-compatible driver.) What You Can Do with This Software This software enables you to preview scan results or set document type and output size, etc. when scanning documents.
Advanced Mode Use the Advanced Mode tab to specify the color mode, output resolution, image brightness, color tone, etc. when scanning.
Scanning with Advanced Settings Using ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Scanning in Basic Mode Scanning in Advanced Mode Scanning Multiple Documents from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder) in Advanced Mode Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear (Scanner Driver) 661
Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Use ScanGear (scanner driver) to make image corrections and color adjustments when scanning. ScanGear can be started from IJ Scan Utility or other applications. Note • Set up the network environment if you have more than one scanner or have a network compatible model and changed the connection from USB connection to network connection. Starting IJ Scan Utility Follow these steps to start ScanGear from IJ Scan Utility. 1. Start IJ Scan Utility.
Scanning in Basic Mode Use the Basic Mode tab to scan easily by following the on-screen steps. Refer to "Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear (Scanner Driver)" to scan multiple documents at one time from the Platen. When scanning from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder), documents are scanned without preview. Important • The following types of documents may not be scanned correctly. In that case, click on the Toolbar to switch to whole image view and scan.
Important • Some applications do not support continuous scanning from the ADF. For details, refer to the application's manual. Note • To scan magazines containing many color photos, select Magazine (Color). 3. Click Preview. Preview image appears in the Preview area. Important • Preview is not displayed when an ADF type is selected for Select Source. Note • Colors are adjusted based on the document type selected in Select Source. 4. Set Destination.
8. Click Scan. Scanning starts. Note • Click (Information) to open a dialog box in which you can check the current scan settings (document type, etc.). • A response of ScanGear after scanning can be specified in Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning on the Scan tab of the Preferences dialog box.
Scanning in Advanced Mode Use the Advanced Mode tab to specify the color mode, output resolution, image brightness, color tone, etc. when scanning. Refer to "Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear (Scanner Driver)" to scan multiple documents at one time. Refer to "Scanning Multiple Documents from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder) in Advanced Mode" to scan multiple documents placed on the ADF (Auto Document Feeder). Important • The following types of documents may not be scanned correctly.
3. Set Input Settings according to the document or purpose. 4. Click Preview. Preview images appear in the Preview area. 5. Set Output Settings. 6. Adjust the cropping frame (scan area), correct image, and adjust colors as required. Adjusting Cropping Frames (ScanGear) Image Settings Color Adjustment Buttons 7. Click Scan. Scanning starts. Note • Click (Information) to open a dialog box in which you can check the current scan settings (document type, etc.).
Scanning Multiple Documents from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder) in Advanced Mode Use the Advanced Mode tab to specify the image brightness, color tone, etc. and scan multiple documents placed on the ADF (Auto Document Feeder) at one time. When using a model supporting ADF duplex scanning, you can scan both sides of the documents automatically from the ADF. When scanning from the ADF, documents are scanned without preview. 1.
Note • Click (Information) to open a dialog box in which you can check the current scan settings (document type, etc.). • A response of ScanGear after scanning can be specified in Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning on the Scan tab of the Preferences dialog box.
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear (Scanner Driver) You can scan two or more photos (small documents) on the Platen at one time on the Basic Mode tab and Advanced Mode tab. This section explains how to scan multiple documents from the Basic Mode tab. Important • To scan multiple documents as a single image, scan in whole image view. • The following types of documents may not be cropped correctly. In that case, adjust the cropping frames (scan areas) in whole image view and scan.
3. Click Preview. Thumbnails of the preview images appear in the Preview area. Cropping frames are specified automatically according to the document size. 4. Set Destination. 5. Set Output Size according to purpose. 6. Adjust the cropping frames and set Image corrections as required. Note • You can correct each image separately. Select the frame you want to correct. • In thumbnail view, you can only create one cropping frame per image.
7. Select the images you want to scan. Select the checkboxes of the images you want to scan. 8. Click Scan. Scanning Multiple Documents in Whole Image View Follow these steps if thumbnails are not displayed correctly when previewed or if you want to scan multiple documents as a single image. Note • Positions of slanted documents are not corrected in whole image view. 1. After previewing images, click (Thumbnail) on the Toolbar. Switch to whole image view.
Adjust the size and position of the cropping frames on the preview image. You can also create two or more cropping frames. If an area is not specified, the document will be scanned at the document size (Auto Crop). If an area is specified, only the portion in the specified area will be scanned. Adjusting Cropping Frames (ScanGear) 5. Set Image corrections as required. 6. Click Scan. Areas framed by broken lines are scanned.
Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Correcting Images (Unsharp Mask, Reduce Dust and Scratches, Fading Correction, etc.
Correcting Images (Unsharp Mask, Reduce Dust and Scratches, Fading Correction, etc.) The Image Settings functions on the Advanced Mode tab of ScanGear (scanner driver) allow you to enhance the outline of the subjects, reduce dust/scratches, and correct faded colors when scanning images. Setting Items Click (Arrow) of a function and select an item from the pull-down menu. Important • Do not apply these functions to images without moire, dust/scratches, or faded colors.
Reducing show-through in text documents or lightening the base color in recycled paper, newspapers, etc. when scanning documents Set Reduce Show-through to ON. OFF ON Sharpening slightly out-of-focus images Set Unsharp Mask to ON. OFF ON Reducing gradations and stripe patterns Set Descreen to ON.
Note • Printed photos and pictures are displayed as a collection of fine dots. "Moire" is a phenomenon where uneven gradation or a stripe pattern appears when such photos or pictures printed with fine dots are scanned. Descreen is the function for reducing this moire effect. Reducing dust and scratches Set Reduce Dust and Scratches to Low, Medium, or High according to the degree of dust and scratches.
Adjusting Colors Using a Color Pattern You can preview color changes and reproduce natural colors by using the color pattern function in ScanGear (scanner driver)'s Basic Mode tab. Color Adjustment Correct colors that have faded with time or due to colorcast. "Colorcast" is a phenomenon where a specific color affects the entire picture due to the weather or ambient strong colors. Click an arrow in Color Adjustment to emphasize the corresponding color.
Preview image appears in the center. Preview image colors change as you adjust them. Below is an example of correcting a bluish image. Since Blue and Green are too strong, click the Yellow and Magenta arrows to correct. Before After Note • Color adjustments are applied only to the cropping frames (scan areas) or the frame selected in thumbnail view. • You can select multiple frames or cropping frames by clicking them while pressing the Ctrl key.
Adjusting Saturation and Color Balance You can brighten colors that have faded with time or due to colorcast by using Balance) in ScanGear (scanner driver)'s Advanced Mode tab. (Saturation/Color Note • Click Defaults to reset all adjustments in the current window. Saturation Adjust the image's saturation (vividness). You can brighten colors that have faded with time, etc.
Move (Slider) under Color Balance to the left or right to emphasize the corresponding color. Cyan & Red Magenta & Green Yellow & Blue These are complementary color pairs (each pair produces a shade of gray when mixed). You can reproduce the natural colors of the scene by reducing the cast color and increasing the complementary color. It is usually difficult to correct the image completely by adjusting only one color pair.
Adjusting Brightness and Contrast You can adjust images that are too dark or bright, or too flat due to lack of contrast by using (Brightness/Contrast) in ScanGear (scanner driver)'s Advanced Mode tab. Note (Down arrow) to switch to detailed view. Click (Up arrow) to return to the previous view. • Click • Click Defaults to reset all adjustments in the current window. Channel Each dot of an image is a mixture of Red, Green, and Blue in various proportions (gradation).
Brightness Adjust the image brightness. (Slider) under Brightness to the left to darken and right to brighten the image. You can also Move enter a value (-127 to 127). Darkened Original image Brightened Note • Highlights may be lost if you brighten the image too much, and shadows may be lost if you darken the image too much. Contrast "Contrast" is the degree of difference between the brighter and darker parts of an image. Increasing contrast will increase the difference, thus sharpening the image.
Adjusting Histogram You can adjust the image color tone by using a graph (histogram) showing brightness distribution, via (Histogram) in ScanGear (scanner driver)'s Advanced Mode tab. Note • Click Defaults to reset all adjustments in the current window. Channel Each dot of an image is a mixture of Red, Green, and Blue in various proportions (gradation). These colors can be adjusted individually as a "channel." Master Adjust the Red, Green, and Blue combined. Red Adjust the Red channel.
(1) Bright area (2) Dark area (3) Whole image More data is distributed to the highlight side. More data is distributed to the shadow side. Data is widely distributed between the highlight and shadow. Adjusting Histograms (Using the Slider) Select a Channel, then move set as the shadow or highlight. (Black-point Slider) or (White-point Slider) to specify the level to be • All parts to the left of (Black-point Slider) will be black (level 0).
Moving the Mid-point Slider Move the Mid-point Slider to specify the level to be set as the middle of the tonal range. Images with more data distributed to the highlight side Move the Mid-point Slider toward the highlight side. Images with more data distributed to the shadow side Move the Mid-point Slider toward the shadow side.
• The point clicked with value (10 to 255). • Click image. (White-point Dropper) will be the brightest point. You can also enter a (Dropper) for Gray Balance and click the area you want to adjust the color in the preview The clicked point will be set as the achromatic color reference, and the rest of the image is adjusted accordingly. For instance, if snow in a photo appears bluish, click the bluish part to adjust the whole image and reproduce natural colors.
Adjusting Tone Curve You can adjust the brightness of an image by selecting the type of graph (tone curve) showing the balance of tone input and output, via tab. (Tone Curve Settings) in ScanGear (scanner driver)'s Advanced Mode Note • Click Defaults to reset all adjustments in the current window. Channel Each dot of an image is a mixture of Red, Green, and Blue in various proportions (gradation). These colors can be adjusted individually as a "channel." Master Adjust the Red, Green, and Blue combined.
Adjusting Tone Curve In Select Tone Curve, select a tone curve from No correction, Overexposure, Underexposure, High contrast, Reverse the negative/positive image, and Edit custom curve. No correction (No adjustment) Overexposure (Convex curve) The midtone data of the input side is stretched toward the highlight of the output side, resulting in a brighttoned image when viewed on a monitor.
Edit custom curve You can drag specific points on the Tone Curve to freely adjust the brightness of the corresponding areas.
Setting Threshold You can sharpen text in a document or reduce show-through in newspapers by adjusting the threshold level via (Threshold) in ScanGear (scanner driver)'s Advanced Mode tab. Note • This function is available when Color Mode is Black and White. • Click Defaults to reset all adjustments in the current window. Adjusting Threshold The brightness of color and grayscale images is expressed in a value between 0 and 255.
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens Basic Mode Tab Advanced Mode Tab Input Settings Output Settings Image Settings Color Adjustment Buttons Preferences Dialog Box Scanner Tab Preview Tab Scan Tab Color Settings Tab 693
Basic Mode Tab This mode allows you to scan easily by following the on-screen steps. This section describes the settings and functions available on the Basic Mode tab. (1) Settings and Operation Buttons (2) Toolbar (3) Preview Area Note • The displayed items vary by document type and view. • The preview function is not available when scanning from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder). (1) Settings and Operation Buttons Select Source Photo (Color) Scan color photos. Magazine (Color) Scan color magazines.
Important • Some applications do not support continuous scanning from the ADF. For details, refer to the application's manual. Note • When you select a document type, the unsharp mask function will be active. • When you select an option other than the ADF types, the image adjustment function which adjusts images based on the document type will also be active. • If you select Magazine (Color), the descreen function will be active. Display Preview Image Preview Performs a trial scan.
Flexible Allows you to freely adjust the cropping frames (scan areas). In thumbnail view: Drag the mouse over a thumbnail to display a cropping frame. When a cropping frame is displayed, the portion within the cropping frame will be scanned. When no cropping frame is displayed, each frame is scanned individually. In whole image view: When no cropping frame is displayed, the entire Preview area will be scanned. When a cropping frame is displayed, the portion within the cropping frame will be scanned.
Note • Save up to 10 items. • An error message appears when you enter a value outside the setting range. Enter a value within the setting range. Note • For details on whether or how the cropping frame is initially displayed on a preview image, refer to Cropping Frame on Previewed Images in "Preview Tab" (Preferences dialog box). Invert aspect ratio Available when Output Size is set to anything but Flexible. Click this button to rotate the cropping frame.
Important • This setting is not available when you select Color Matching on the Color Settings tab of the Preferences dialog box. Perform Scan Scan Starts scanning. Note • When scanning starts, the progress will be displayed. Click Cancel to cancel the scan. Preferences... Opens the Preferences dialog box in which you can make scan/preview settings. Close Closes ScanGear (scanner driver). (2) Toolbar You can adjust or rotate preview images. The buttons displayed on the Toolbar vary by view.
(Check All Frames) Available when two or more frames are displayed. Selects the checkboxes of the image in thumbnail view. (Uncheck All Frames) Available when two or more frames are displayed. Deselects the checkboxes of the image in thumbnail view. (Select All Frames) Available when two or more frames are displayed. Selects the images in thumbnail view and outlines them in blue. (Select All Cropping Frames) Available when two or more cropping frames are specified.
Note • When multiple images are previewed, different outlines indicate different selection status. • Focus Frame (thick blue outline): The displayed settings will be applied. • Selected Frame (thin blue outline): The settings will be applied to the Focus Frame and Selected Frames simultaneously. You can select multiple images by clicking them while pressing the Ctrl key. • Unselected (no outline): The settings will not be applied. • Double-click a frame to zoom in on the image.
Related Topic Scanning in Basic Mode 701
Advanced Mode Tab This mode allows you to make advanced scan settings such as the color mode, output resolution, image brightness, and color tone. This section describes the settings and functions available on the Advanced Mode tab. (1) Settings and Operation Buttons (2) Toolbar (3) Preview Area Note • The displayed items vary by document type and view. • The preview function is not available when scanning from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder).
Enter Setting Name and click Add; the name appears in Favorite Settings List. When you click Save, the item appears in the Favorite Settings list and can be selected, along with the predefined items. To delete an item, select it in Favorite Settings List and click Delete. Click Save to save the settings displayed in Favorite Settings List. Note • You can set Add/Delete... in Favorite Settings after preview. • Save up to 10 items. Input Settings Specify the input settings such as the document type and size.
Scan Starts scanning. Note • When scanning starts, the progress will be displayed. Click Cancel to cancel the scan. • When scanning is completed, a dialog box prompting you to select the next action may appear. Follow the prompt to complete. For details, refer to Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning in Scan Tab (Preferences dialog box). • It will take time to process the images if the total size of the scanned images exceeds a certain size.
(3) Preview Area (Clear) Deletes the preview image from the Preview area. It also resets the Toolbar and color adjustment settings. (Crop) Allows you to specify the scan area by dragging the mouse. (Move Image) Allows you to drag the image until the part you want to see is displayed when an image enlarged in the Preview area does not fit in the screen. You can also move the image using the scroll bars. (Enlarge/Reduce) Allows you to zoom in on the Preview area by clicking the image.
(Remove Cropping Frame) Removes the selected cropping frame. (Information) Displays the version of ScanGear and the current scan settings (document type, etc.). (Open Guide) Opens this page. (3) Preview Area This is where a trial image appears after you click Preview. You can also check the results of the settings (image corrections, color adjustments, etc.) made in "(1) Settings and Operation Buttons.
Note • You can specify the cropping frame on the displayed image. In thumbnail view, you can only create one cropping frame per image. In whole image view, you can create multiple cropping frames.
Input Settings Input Settings allows you to set the following items: Select Source The type of document to be scanned is displayed. To scan from the Platen, select Platen; to scan from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder), select Document (ADF Simplex) or Document (ADF Duplex). Important • Some applications do not support continuous scanning from the ADF. For details, refer to the application's manual. Note • You can select Document (ADF Duplex) when using a model supporting ADF duplex scanning.
Click Settings... to open the Orientation dialog box. Important • The Orientation dialog box can only be opened when Select Source is Document (ADF Simplex) or Document (ADF Duplex). • Binding Location is displayed when using a model supporting ADF duplex scanning. • Binding Location cannot be specified when Select Source is Document (ADF Simplex). Color Mode Select how to scan the document. Color Select this mode to scan color documents or to create color images.
Note • The values you can enter will be within the range of the selected document size. The minimum size is 96 pixels x 96 pixels when Output Resolution is 600 dpi, scaled at 100 %. • When Auto Crop is performed in whole image view, the aspect ratio will not be maintained since the size will be prioritized. • Refer to "Adjusting Cropping Frames (ScanGear)" for details on cropping frames.
Output Settings Output Settings allows you to set the following items: Output Resolution Select the resolution to scan at. The higher the resolution (value), the more detail in your image. Select a resolution from the options displayed by clicking the button, or enter a value in 1 dpi increments. Refer to "Resolution" for your model from Home of the Online Manual for details. When Select Source is Platen: You can enter a value within the range of 25 dpi to 19200 dpi.
In whole image view: When no cropping frame is displayed, the entire Preview area will be scanned. When a cropping frame is displayed, the portion within the cropping frame will be scanned. Note • To enlarge/reduce the scanned image, enter values into (Width) and (Height) in Output Settings or specify a value (by 1 %) for %. Although the maximum value available for % depends on the Output Resolution, it can be specified for up to 19200 dpi (the maximum available output resolution). Paper Size (L, A4, etc.
Note • Refer to "Adjusting Cropping Frames (ScanGear)" for details on cropping frames. • For details on whether or how the cropping frame is initially displayed on a preview image, refer to Cropping Frame on Previewed Images in "Preview Tab" (Preferences dialog box). (Switch Aspect Ratio) Available when Output Size is set to anything but Flexible. Click this button to rotate the cropping frame. Click again to return it to the original orientation.
Image Settings Important • Do not apply these functions to images without moire, dust/scratches, or faded colors. The color tone may be adversely affected. • Image correction results may not be reflected in the preview image. Note • Selectable settings depend on Color Mode settings. • Scanning may take longer than usual when you use Image Settings.
Important • You can set Image Adjustment after preview. • You can set this setting when Recommended is selected on the Color Settings tab of the Preferences dialog box. Note • If the image is not adjusted properly with Auto, specify the document type. • The color tone may change from the source image due to the Image Adjustment. In that case, set Image Adjustment to None.
Low Select this to reduce small dust particles and scratches. Large ones may remain. Medium It is recommended that you normally select this setting. High Select this to reduce large dust particles and scratches; however, evidence of the reduction process may remain or delicate parts of the image may be removed. Important • This function may not be effective for some types of photos. Note • It is recommended that you select None when scanning printed materials.
Gutter Shadow Correction Use this function to correct shadows that appear between pages when scanning open booklets. When you set the Gutter Shadow Correction setting in the preview image, the result will be reflected. Preview the effects before scanning, as results vary depending on the type of document and how it is pressed. Unclear or blurred text/lines caused by curved pages are not corrected. None Gutter shadow will not be corrected.
• If the shadow is not corrected properly, adjust the cropping frame (scan area) on the preview image.
Color Adjustment Buttons The Color Adjustment Buttons allow you to make fine corrections to the image brightness and color tones including adjustments to the image's overall brightness or contrast and adjustments to its highlight and shadow values (histogram) or balance (tone curve). Important • The Color Adjustment Buttons are not available when you select Color Matching on the Color Settings tab of the Preferences dialog box. Note • Selectable settings depend on Color Mode settings.
(Histogram) A histogram allows you to see the data concentration at each brightness level of an image. You can specify the brightest level (highlight) and darkest level (shadow) within an image, cut the levels and expand the middle of the tonal range of the image. Adjusting Histogram (Tone Curve Settings) Adjust the brightness of an image by selecting the type of graph (tone curve) showing the balance of tone input and output. You can make fine adjustments to the brightness of a specific area.
Enter Setting Name and click Add; the name appears in Tone Curve Settings List or Threshold Settings List. Click Save to save. To delete an item, select it in Tone Curve Settings List or Threshold Settings List and click Delete. Click Save to save the settings displayed in Tone Curve Settings List or Threshold Settings List. You can load and apply the saved tone curve/threshold settings to a preview image. To load the settings, select the saved item from the pull-down menu. Note • Save up to 20 items.
Preferences Dialog Box In the Preferences dialog box, you can make advanced settings to ScanGear (scanner driver) functions via the Scanner, Preview, Scan, and Color Settings tabs. Click Preferences... in the ScanGear screen to open the Preferences dialog box. Scanner Tab Allows you to set the quiet mode, specify the folder in which to save images temporarily, and set the music file to play during or at the end of a scan.
Scanner Tab On the Scanner tab, you can specify the following settings. Important • Available functions and settings vary depending on your scanner or printer. Auto Power Settings You can set to turn the machine on or off automatically. Click Settings... to display the Auto Power Settings dialog box. Note • If the machine is off or bi-directional communication is disabled, a message may appear because the computer cannot collect the machine status.
Quiet Settings The silent function allows you to reduce the operating noise of this machine. Use this when you wish to reduce the operating noise such as when scanning or printing at night. Click Settings... to set the quiet mode. Note • You can set the quiet mode from the operation panel of the machine, the printer driver, or ScanGear. No matter how the setting is made, it applies to operations from the operation panel of the machine or when printing/scanning from a computer, etc.
Calibration Settings When you set Execute at Every Scan to ON, the scanner will be calibrated every time before previewing and scanning, to reproduce correct color tones in scanned images. Note • Even when Execute at Every Scan is set to OFF, the scanner may be calibrated automatically in some cases (such as immediately after you turn the machine on). • Calibration may take time depending on your computer.
Preview Tab On the Preview tab, you can specify the following settings. Preview at Start of ScanGear Select what to do with Preview when ScanGear (scanner driver) is started. Automatically Execute Preview ScanGear will automatically start previewing at startup. Display Saved Preview Image The previously previewed image will be displayed. The Color Adjustment Button settings, the Toolbar settings, and the Advanced Mode tab settings are also saved. None No preview image will be displayed at startup.
Larger Displays 105 % (in width and height) of the area displayed for the standard size. Standard The standard size. Smaller Displays 95 % (in width and height) of the area displayed for the standard size. Note • When you change the Cropping Size for Thumbnail View setting, the preview images will be refreshed and cropped to the new size. As the preview images are refreshed, the color adjustments and other settings applied to them are reset.
Scan Tab On the Scan tab, you can specify the following settings. Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning Select what to do with ScanGear (scanner driver) after scanning images. Close ScanGear automatically Select this to return to the original application when scanning is completed. Do not close ScanGear automatically Select this to return to the ScanGear screen for another scan when scanning is completed.
Color Settings Tab On the Color Settings tab, you can specify the following settings. Color Adjustment Select one of the following. Recommended Select this to vividly reproduce the tone of a document on the screen. It is recommended that you normally select this setting. Color Matching Select this to automatically match the scanner, monitor, and color printer colors, thus reducing time and trouble to manually match the monitor and printer colors. Source(Scanner) Select scanner profile.
Note • Depending on your scanner or printer, this setting may not be available when scanning from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder). • You can select one when Color Mode is Color or Grayscale. • Color Matching is available when ScanGear, monitor, color management-compliant application (such as Adobe Photoshop), and printer are set up correctly. Refer to the corresponding manual for the monitor, printer, and application settings.
Placing Items (When Scanning from a Computer) Learn how to place items on the platen or ADF (Auto Document Feeder) of your scanner or printer. Place items correctly according to the type of item to be scanned. Otherwise, items may not be scanned correctly. Important • Do not place objects on the document cover. When you open the document cover, the objects may fall into your scanner or printer, resulting in malfunction. • Close the document cover when scanning.
the platen may be saved as PDF files. To save in a format other than PDF, scan by specifying the data format. Placing Multiple Items: Allow 0.4 inch (1 cm) or more space between the edges (diagonally striped area) of the platen and items, and between items. Portions placed on the diagonally striped area cannot be scanned. more than 0.4 inch (1 cm) Note • You can place up to 12 items.
2. Place the documents on the ADF, then adjust the document guides to the width of the documents. Insert the documents face-up until a beep sounds. Note • When scanning duplex documents, place the front sides facing up. They will not be scanned in the correct page order if placed the other way around.
Adjusting Cropping Frames (ScanGear) "Cropping" is the act of selecting the area you want to keep in an image and discarding the rest when scanning it. On the Basic Mode tab and Advanced Mode tab, you can specify cropping frames (scan areas) on the image(s) displayed in the Preview area of the screen. When you perform a scan, each area specified with a cropping frame will be scanned as a separate image. Note • In whole image view, you can specify multiple cropping frames on the preview image.
In whole image view: Represents an unselected cropping frame. The settings on the Basic Mode tab or Advanced Mode tab will not be applied. Adjusting a Cropping Frame The cursor will change into (Arrow) when it is positioned over a cropping frame. If you click and drag the mouse in the direction of the arrow, the cropping frame will expand or contract accordingly. The cursor will change into (Crosshair Arrow) when it is positioned within a cropping frame.
In whole image view: Click and drag the mouse in a space outside the existing cropping frame to create a new cropping frame in the Preview area. The new cropping frame will be the active cropping frame, and the old cropping frame will be the unselected cropping frame. You can create multiple cropping frames and apply different scan settings to each cropping frame. You can also select multiple cropping frames by clicking them while pressing the Ctrl key.
In whole image view: To delete a cropping frame, select it and click Alternatively, press the Delete key. (Remove Cropping Frame) on the Toolbar. When there are multiple cropping frames, all the selected cropping frames (active cropping frame and selected cropping frames) are deleted simultaneously.
General Notes (Scanner Driver) ScanGear (scanner driver) is subject to the following restrictions. Keep these points in mind when using it. Scanner Driver Restrictions • When using the NTFS file system, the TWAIN data source may not be invoked. This is because the TWAIN module cannot be written to the winnt folder for security reasons. Contact the computer's administrator for help. • Some computers (including laptops) connected to the machine may not resume correctly from standby mode.
• When scanning images into Microsoft Office 2007/Microsoft Office 2010 (Word, Excel, PowerPoint, etc.), use Microsoft Clip Organizer. • Images may not be scanned correctly in some applications. In that case, increase the operating system's virtual memory and retry. • When image size is too large (such as when scanning large images at high resolution), your computer may not respond or the progress bar may remain at 0 % depending on the application.
Useful Information on Scanning Adjusting Cropping Frames in the Image Stitch Window Resolution Data Formats Color Matching 740
Adjusting Cropping Frames in the Image Stitch Window "Cropping" is the act of selecting the area you want to keep in an image and discarding the rest when scanning it. In the Image Stitch window, you can specify a cropping frame on the image displayed in the Preview area. Note • Refer to "Adjusting Cropping Frames (ScanGear)" for your model from Home of the Online Manual for how to adjust cropping frames with ScanGear (scanner driver). Initial Cropping Frame No cropping frame is specified.
Resolution The data in the image you have scanned is a collection of dots carrying information about brightness and color. The density of these dots is called "resolution", and resolution will determine the amount of detail your image contains. The unit of resolution is dots per inch (dpi). Dpi is the number of dots per inch (2.5 cm). The higher the resolution (value), the more detail in your image; the lower the resolution (value), the less detail.
Important • If you double the resolution, the data size of the scanned image quadruples. If the file is too large, the processing speed will slow down significantly, and you will experience inconvenience such as lack of memory. Set the minimum required resolution according to the use of the image. Note • When you will be printing the scanned image by enlarging it, scan by setting a higher resolution than the recommended one above.
Data Formats You can select a data format when saving scanned images. You should specify the most suitable data format according to how you want to use the image on which application. Available data formats vary by application and operating system (Windows or Mac OS). See below for the characteristics of each image data format. PNG (Standard File Extension: .png) A data format often used on websites. PNG is suitable for editing saved images. JPEG (Standard File Extension: .
Color Matching "Color Matching" is the act of making adjustments so that the color tones match between the original item, the monitor display, and the color printout. On your scanner or printer, the color tones are adjusted as shown below. Example: When sRGB is selected as the output profile (target): The image's color space is converted from the scanner's color space to sRGB by ScanGear.
IJ Network Scanner Selector EX Menu and Setting Screen IJ Network Scanner Selector EX allows you to select the scanners or printers to be used for scanning or printing over a network from your computer or the operation panel. After installation, IJ Network Scanner Selector EX appears in the notification area on the desktop. Important • If you cannot scan over a network, download and upgrade to the latest MP Drivers from our website.
Exit Exits IJ Network Scanner Selector EX; notification area on the desktop. (Enabled) or (Disabled) disappears from the Scan-from-PC Settings Screen Right-click the icon from the notification area on the desktop, then select Settings... to display the Scanfrom-PC Settings screen. Your scanner or printer must be selected with IJ Network Scanner Selector EX before scanning over a network. Scanners MAC addresses of the scanners or printers that can be used over the network are displayed.
• Network communication between your scanner or printer and computer is enabled If your scanner or printer still does not appear, refer to "Problems with Network Communication" for your model from Home of the Online Manual. • You do not need to use this software when scanning via USB. Refer to "Uninstalling IJ Network Scanner Selector EX" to delete it. You can scan via USB even if it is not deleted.
Uninstalling IJ Network Scanner Selector EX Follow the procedure below to uninstall IJ Network Scanner Selector EX from your computer. Important • You cannot scan over a network after uninstalling IJ Network Scanner Selector EX. • Log into a user account with administrator privilege. 1. Uninstall IJ Network Scanner Selector EX. • Windows 8.1/Windows 8: 1. Click the Settings charm > Control Panel > Programs > Programs and Features. 2. Double-click Canon IJ Network Scanner Selector EX.
Other Scanning Methods Scanning with WIA Driver Scanning Using the Control Panel (Windows XP Only) 750
Scanning with WIA Driver You can scan an item from a WIA (Windows Image Acquisition)-compliant application. WIA is a driver model implemented in Windows XP or later. It allows you to scan items without using an application. The procedure varies depending on the application. The following procedures are examples only. Refer to the application's manual for details. Important • In Windows XP, you cannot scan using the WIA driver via a network connection.
Profile Select Photo (Default) or Documents according to the type of item to be scanned. To save a new Profile, select Add profile.... You can specify the details in the Add New Profile dialog box. Source Select a scanner type. To scan from the platen, select Flatbed. To scan from the ADF, select Feeder (Scan one side) or Feeder (Scan both sides). Paper size Select the paper size. Paper size can be set only when Source is Feeder (Scan one side) or Feeder (Scan both sides).
When scanning is completed, the scanned image appears in the application. Scanning with WIA Driver 1.0 The following is an example of scanning using "Paint." 1. Place the item on the platen or ADF. Placing Items (When Scanning from a Computer) 2. Click From scanner or camera from the File menu of Paint. (Select the command to scan an item in the application.) Note • If you have more than one scanner or printer, a scanner selection screen may appear. Doubleclick the scanner you want to use.
Note • When using the scanner or printer with network connection, the following resolutions can be specified. 150 dpi / 300 dpi / 600 dpi Picture type Select the type of scan you want for your item. Reset Click to restore the original settings. Important • When using the scanner or printer with network connection, you cannot specify Brightness and Contrast. 5. Click Preview to preview the image. The preview image appears on the right. Drag to specify the scan area.
Scanning Using the Control Panel (Windows XP Only) You can scan images via the Control Panel of Windows XP using the WIA driver. Important • When using the scanner or printer with network connection, you cannot scan using the WIA driver. 1. From the Start menu, select Control Panel. 2. Click Printers and Other Hardware > Scanners and Cameras, then double-click Canon XXX series (where "XXX" is the model name). The Scanner and Camera Wizard dialog box appears. 3. Click Next. 4.
Brightness Move the slider to adjust the brightness. Move it to the left to darken and right to brighten the image. You can also enter a value (-127 to 127). Contrast Move the slider to adjust the contrast. Moving it to the left will decrease the contrast of the image, thus softening the image. Moving it to the right will increase the contrast of the image, thus sharpening the image. You can also enter a value (-127 to 127). Resolution (DPI) Enter the resolution. Specify a value between 50 dpi and 600 dpi.
Placing Items (When Scanning from a Computer) Learn how to place items on the platen or ADF (Auto Document Feeder) of your scanner or printer. Place items correctly according to the type of item to be scanned. Otherwise, items may not be scanned correctly. Important • Do not place objects on the document cover. When you open the document cover, the objects may fall into your scanner or printer, resulting in malfunction. • Close the document cover when scanning.
the platen may be saved as PDF files. To save in a format other than PDF, scan by specifying the data format. Placing Multiple Items: Allow 0.4 inch (1 cm) or more space between the edges (diagonally striped area) of the platen and items, and between items. Portions placed on the diagonally striped area cannot be scanned. more than 0.4 inch (1 cm) Note • You can place up to 12 items. • Positions of slanted items (10 degrees or less) are corrected automatically.
Note • When scanning duplex documents, place the front sides facing up. They will not be scanned correctly if placed the other way around.
Scanning from the Operation Panel of the Machine Forwarding Scanned Data to the Computer Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Basic Attaching the Scanned Data to E-mail Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Saving Scanned Data on the USB Flash Drive Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Forwarding Scanned Data to Shared Folder on the Computer Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Deleting Scanned Data on USB Flash Drive Setting Items for Scanning Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Network
Forwarding Scanned Data to the Computer Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Before forwarding scanned data to the computer, confirm the following: • MP Drivers are installed. If MP Drivers are not yet installed, install MP Drivers with the Setup CD-ROM or install them from our website. • The machine is connected to a computer correctly. Make sure that the machine is connected to the computer correctly.
The Scan standby screen is displayed. Note • When you forward the scanned data to the computer using WSD (one of the network protocols supported in Windows 8.1, Windows 8, Windows 7, and Windows Vista), select Enable for WSD scan from this device on WSD setting on Other settings in LAN settings under Device settings. WSD setting If you tap Search again, the machine starts searching for the connected computers again. 5. Specify the settings as necessary. A. Tap to select the document type.
D. Tap to display the screen to select the destination. 6. Load the original document on the platen glass or in the ADF. 7. Press the Color button for color scanning, or the Black button for black & white scanning. Note • When you forward the scanned data to the computer using WSD, press the Color button. • If the original is not loaded properly, a message is displayed on the touch screen. Load the original on the platen glass or in the ADF according to the scan settings.
If you want to scan originals with advanced settings, or if you want to edit or print the scanned images: If you scan originals from a computer, you can edit the scanned images, such as optimizing or trimming. In addition, you can edit or print the scanned images using the compatible application software to make better use of them. Scanning with IJ Scan Utility Note • You can use a WIA-compliant application software and the Control Panel (Windows XP only) to scan originals with this machine.
Attaching the Scanned Data to E-mail Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Before attaching scanned data to an e-mail, confirm the following: • MP Drivers are installed. If MP Drivers are not yet installed, install MP Drivers with the Setup CD-ROM or install them from our website. • The machine is connected to a computer correctly. Make sure that the machine is connected to the computer correctly.
The Scan standby screen is displayed. 5. Specify the settings as necessary. A. Tap to select the document type. Document Scans the original on the platen glass or in the ADF as a document data applying the settings specified in Scan settings. Photo Scans the original on the platen glass as a photo data applying the settings specified in Scan settings. B. Tap to display Scan settings screen. For details on the setting items: Setting Items for Scanning Using the Operation Panel of the Machine C.
• If you load the original in the ADF: The machine starts scanning and scanned data is forwarded to the computer and attached to an email. • If you load the original on the platen glass: ◦ When you select JPEG for Format on the scan setting screen, the machine starts scanning and scanned data is forwarded to the computer and attached to an e-mail.
Saving Scanned Data on the USB Flash Drive Using the Operation Panel of the Machine You can save scanned data on the USB flash drive directly. Important • Do not remove the USB flash drive from the machine under the following conditions: • While scanning is in progress • Before saving the scanned data • For safety reasons, we recommend backing up the scanned data saved on a USB flash drive to another media periodically to avoid unexpected accidents.
6. Adjust the settings as necessary. A. Tap to select the document type. Document Scans the original on the platen glass or the ADF as a document data applying the settings specified in Scan settings. Photo Scans the original on the platen glass as a photo data applying the settings specified in Scan settings. B. Tap to display Scan settings screen. For details on the setting items: Setting Items for Scanning Using the Operation Panel of the Machine C.
B. Tap to rotate the preview screen. Displayed when you select PDF or Compact PDF for Format on the scan setting screen. C. Tap to save the scanned original on the USB flash drive. D. Tap to rescan the original. • If you load the original in the ADF: The machine starts scanning and scanned data is saved on the USB flash drive.
Forwarding Scanned Data to Shared Folder on the Computer Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Before forwarding scanned data on the shared folder on the computer, confirm the following: • MP Drivers and Canon Quick Toolbox are installed. If MP Drivers and Canon Quick Toolbox are not yet installed, install them with the Setup CD-ROM or install them from our website. • The machine is connected to a computer via a LAN correctly. • The destination folder is specified in Canon Quick Toolbox.
Note • When you specify a PIN code for a registered folder, a screen asking you to enter a PIN code is displayed. Entering the PIN code allows you to assign the shared folder as the destination. 5. Specify the settings as necessary. A. Tap to select the document type. Document Scans the original on the platen glass or in the ADF as a document data applying the settings specified in Scan settings. Photo Scans the original on the platen glass as a photo data applying the settings specified in Scan settings.
A. The preview screen of the scanning data is displayed. B. Tap to rotate the preview screen. Displayed when you select PDF or Compact PDF for Format on the scan setting screen. C. Tap to forward the scanned original to the shared folder on the computer. D. Tap to rescan the original. • If you load the original in the ADF: The machine starts scanning and scanned data is forwarded to the shared folder of the computer.
Deleting Scanned Data on USB Flash Drive You can delete scanned data on the USB flash drive using the operation panel. 1. Make sure that the machine is turned on. 2. Flick the HOME screen, then tap Scan. Using the Operation Panel The screen for selecting to which you save the data is displayed. 3. Insert the USB flash drive into the USB flash drive port. 4. Tap USB flash drive.
When the format for PDF data is selected, only the first page of the PDF data is displayed on the touch screen. C. Tap to switch the file type displayed on the touch screen. D. Flick to display the data, then tap to delete the data. E. Tap to display the file name list. 7. Tap Yes on the confirmation screen. The machine starts deleting the file.
Setting Items for Scanning Using the Operation Panel of the Machine You can change the scan settings such as the scan size, resolution, or data format. When the Scan standby screen is displayed, tap Settings to select the setting item. Flick to display setting items, then tap the setting item to display the settings. Tap to specify the setting. Note • When you forward the scanned data to the computer using WSD (one of the network protocols supported in Windows 8.
1. Scan size Select the size of the original. 2. Format Select the data format of the scanned data. 3. Scan res (Scan resolution) Select the resolution for scanning. 4. Preview Select to preview the scanned data or not when saving the data on a USB flash drive. 5. ADF orientation Select the orientation of the original document. This setting item is not available when Photo is selected for Doc.type. 6. ADF duplex scan Select the scanning method when using ADF.
8. Descreen A printout consists of minute dots to make characters or graphs. Interfering with each dot may result in uneven shades or a striped pattern. Select ON if you notice any uneven shades or a striped pattern on the scanned image. This setting item is not available when Photo is selected for Doc.type. Note • Even if ON is selected for this setting, some moire effects may remain if Unsharp mask is set to ON. In that case, select OFF for Unsharp mask. 9.
Network Scan Settings You can connect your scanner or printer to a network to share it among multiple computers or scan images into a specified computer. Important • Multiple users cannot scan at the same time. Note • Complete the network settings of your scanner or printer beforehand from the Setup CD-ROM or by following the instructions on the web page. • With network connection, scanning takes longer than USB connection. Complete the following settings to enable scanning over a network.
The icon appears in the notification area on the desktop, and the Scan-from-PC Settings screen appears. In that case, skip ahead to Step 3. 2. In the notification area on the desktop, right-click (IJ Network Scanner Selector EX), then select Settings.... The Scan-from-PC Settings screen appears. 3. Select your scanner or printer from Scanners. Normally, the MAC address of your scanner or printer is already selected after the network setup. In that case, you do not need to select it again.
Setting for Scanning from the Operation Panel You can make the setting for scanning from the operation panel. Important • Set IJ Scan Utility to use your scanner or printer via a network connection beforehand. Setting for Scanning with IJ Scan Utility 1. Check that IJ Network Scanner Selector EX is running. (IJ Network Scanner Selector EX) appears in the If IJ Network Scanner Selector EX is running, notification area on the desktop. Click to check the hidden icons as well.
• MP Drivers is installed • Network settings of your scanner or printer is completed after installing the MP Drivers • Network communication between your scanner or printer and computer is enabled If your scanner or printer still does not appear, refer to "Problems with Network Communication" for your model from Home of the Online Manual.
Selecting a Response to Commands from the Operation Panel Using IJ Scan Utility IJ Scan Utility allows you to specify how to respond when scanning from the operation panel. Note • The screens for scanning photos from the operation panel are used as examples in the following descriptions. 1. Start IJ Scan Utility. 2. Click Settings.... The Settings dialog box appears. 3. Select a scan mode on the (Scanning from the Operation Panel) tab.
Note • Refer to the following for details. Settings (Save to PC (Photo)) Dialog Box Settings (Save to PC (Document)) Dialog Box Settings (Attach to E-mail (Photo)) Dialog Box Settings (Attach to E-mail (Document)) Dialog Box 4. Set Scan Options. 5. Specify the file name and other settings in Save Settings.
6. Select the application you want to start after scanning in Application Settings. 7. Click OK. The responses will be executed according to the specified settings when you start scanning from the operation panel.
Faxing Preparing for Faxing Sending Faxes Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Registering Recipients Receiving Faxes Other Useful Fax Functions Sending Faxes from a Computer 786
Preparing for Faxing Connect the machine to the telephone line and set up the machine before using the faxing functions. Then specify the basic setting such as sender information, date/time, and daylight saving time. Important • If the Power Disconnects Unexpectedly: If there is a power failure or if you accidentally unplug the power cord, the date/time settings will be reset. • The settings for user information and directory will be retained.
Connecting the Telephone Line The connection method differs depending on your telephone line. • If you connect the machine to wall telephone line directly/If you connect the machine with the xDSL splitter: Basic Connection • If you connect the machine to another line such as an xDSL: Connecting Various Lines If the connection is incorrect, the machine cannot send/receive faxes. Connect the machine correctly. Important • Do not connect fax machines and/or telephones in parallel (US and Canada only).
Important • Be sure to connect the telephone line before the machine is turned on. If you connect the telephone line when the machine is turned on, turn the machine off and unplug the power cord. Wait for 1 minute then connect the telephone line and power plug. Note • Refer to Rear View for the position of the telephone line jack and the external device jack. • Before connecting a telephone or answering machine, remove the Telephone connector cap.
Note • When connecting to the xDSL line, select the same line type as you are subscribing to in Telephone line type. Setting the Telephone Line Type • Connecting to an xDSL A. Analog Subscriber Line B. xDSL modem (splitter may not be built-in to the modem) C. Computer D. Telephone or answering machine Important • When the splitter is not built-in to the modem, do not branch the telephone line before the splitter (wall side). And also, do not connect splitters in parallel.
Setting the Telephone Line Type Before using your machine, make sure you set the correct telephone line type for your telephone line. If you are unsure of your telephone line type, contact your telephone company. For xDSL or ISDN connections, contact the telephone company or service provider to confirm your line type. Important • For users in China: After plugging the power cord and turning on the machine, the telephone line type is selected automatically.
Rotary pulse Select when your telephone line type is pulse dialing. Touch tone Select when your telephone line type is tone dialing. Setting the Telephone Line Type Manually in China This section describes the procedure to set the telephone line type manually in China. 1. Make sure that the machine is turned on. 2. Flick the HOME screen, then tap Setup. Using the Operation Panel 3. Tap Device settings. 4. Tap FAX settings. 5. Tap FAX user settings. 6. Tap Telephone line auto selection.
Rotary pulse Select when your telephone line type is pulse dialing. Touch tone Select when your telephone line type is tone dialing.
Setting the Receive Mode Set the receiving operation (receiving mode). For details on how to set the receive mode: Setting the Receive Mode You can select the appropriate mode. For details on the selectable receive mode: About the Receive Mode For details on the advanced settings of the receive mode: Advanced Settings of Receive Mode Note • The receiving operation procedure varies depending on the selected receive mode.
• DRPD is available only in the US and Canada. • Network switch may not be available depending on the country or region of purchase. • Refer to Receiving Faxes for information on receiving faxes or the procedure for each receive mode. About the Receive Mode You can select the receive mode suitable for your fax use conditions: whether you use a dedicated line for fax, etc.
◦ RX start time You can specify the length of time until automatic reception is started when Manual/auto switch: ON is selected. Specify the length of time and tap OK. ◦ User-friendly RX: ON/User-friendly RX: OFF If you select User-friendly RX: ON, the machine automatically switches from telephone calling to fax reception by detecting the fax signal (CNG signal) when you lift the handset of the telephone or the answering machine answers.
Specify the number of time and tap OK. Setting the DRPD Ring Pattern (US and Canada only) If you have subscribed to a Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) service provided by your telephone company, your telephone company will assign two or more telephone numbers with distinctive ring patterns to your single telephone line, allowing you to have different numbers for fax calls and voice calls using only one telephone line.
Setting the Sender Information You can set the sender information such as date/time, unit name, and unit fax/telephone number. About the Sender Information Setting the Date and Time Setting Daylight Saving Time (Summer Time) Registering User Information About the Sender Information If the unit name and unit fax/telephone number are registered, they are printed with date and time as sender information on the recipient's fax. A. Date and time of transmission B. Unit fax/telephone number C. Unit name D.
1. Make sure that the machine is turned on. 2. Flick the HOME screen, then tap Setup. Using the Operation Panel 3. Tap Device settings. 4. Tap Device user settings. 5. Tap Date/time setting. 6. Set the date. 1. Tap a setting item to change. 2. Tap the number to enter. Enter only the last two digits of the year. 3. Tap OK. 4. Tap OK again when all settings are completed. 7. Set the time. 1. Tap a setting item to change.
2. Tap the number to enter. Enter the date and time in 24-hour format. 3. Tap OK. 4. Tap OK again when all settings are completed. 8. Press the HOME button to return to the HOME screen. Setting Daylight Saving Time (Summer Time) Some countries adopt the daylight saving time (summer time) system that shifts the clock time forward at certain periods of the year.
3. Tap Device settings. 4. Tap Device user settings. 5. Tap Daylight saving time setting. 6. Tap ON. To disable summer time, tap OFF. 7. Set the date and time when summer time starts. 1. Set the date when summer time starts. Tap a setting item to change then specify the setting. Tap OK again when all settings are completed. 2. Set the time (in 24-hour format) when summer time starts. Tap a setting item to change then specify the setting. Tap OK again when all settings are completed. 8.
2. Set the time (in 24-hour format) when summer time ends. Tap a setting item to change then specify the setting. Tap OK again when all settings are completed. 9. Press the HOME button to return to the HOME screen. Registering User Information This section describes the procedure to register the user information. Note • Before sending a fax, be sure to enter your name and fax/telephone number in Unit name and Unit TEL on the User information settings screen (for US only). 1.
7. Enter the unit name. 1. Tap the entry field under Unit name. The screen to enter the character is displayed. 2. Enter the unit name. 3. Tap OK. Note • You can enter the name up to 24 characters, including spaces. • For details on how to enter or delete characters: Entering Numbers, Letters, and Symbols 8. Enter the unit fax/telephone number. 1. Tap the entry field under Unit TEL. The screen to enter the number is displayed. 2. Enter the unit fax/telephone number. 3. Tap OK.
Note • You can enter the fax/telephone number up to 20 digits, including spaces. • For details on how to enter or delete characters: Entering Numbers, Letters, and Symbols 9. Tap Register to finalize registration.
Sending Faxes Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Sending Faxes by Entering Fax/Telephone Number Basic Resending Faxes (Redialing a Busy Number) Setting Items for Sending Faxes Sending Faxes Using Useful Functions 805
Sending Faxes by Entering Fax/Telephone Number This section describes dialing and sending faxes directly by entering the fax/telephone numbers. Important • It may be possible that faxes will reach unintended recipients due to the misdialing or incorrect registration of fax/telephone numbers. When you send important documents, it is recommended that you send them after speaking on the telephone. Sending a Fax after Speaking on Telephone 1. Make sure that the machine is turned on. 2.
D. Function list You can use the each fax function and change the setting for the fax. E. Redial Tap to send faxes with redialing. Resending Faxes (Redialing a Busy Number) F. On hook dial Tap to send faxes with the on hook dial function. Using the On Hook Dial Function G. Directory You can select a registered fax/telephone number. Sending a Fax to the Registered Recipient H. Current state The current state is displayed. I.
Enters the number. B. Pause Enters a pause "P". C. Delete Deletes the entered number. D. Blank space Enters a blank space. 3. Tap OK. The touch screen returns to the Fax standby screen. Note • By tapping Save profile, you can register the current print settings as a custom setting. Registering the Favorite Settings (Custom profiles) 5. Press the Color button for color transmission, or the Black button for black & white transmission. The machine starts scanning the document.
Note • To cancel a fax transmission, press the Stop button. To cancel a fax transmission while it is in progress, press the Stop button, then follow the instructions on the touch screen. • If documents remain in the ADF after the Stop button is pressed while scanning is in progress, Document in ADF. Tap [OK] to eject document. is displayed on the touch screen. By tapping OK, the remaining documents are automatically ejected.
Resending Faxes (Redialing a Busy Number) There are two methods of redialing: Automatic redialing and Manual redialing. • Automatic Redialing If you send a document and the recipient's line is busy, the machine will redial the number after a specified interval. Automatic Redialing • Manual Redialing You can redial to the recipients dialed by entering the fax/telephone numbers.
1. Make sure that the machine is turned on. 2. Load documents on the platen glass or in the ADF. 3. Flick the HOME screen, then tap FAX. Using the Operation Panel The Fax standby screen is displayed. 4. Adjust the scan contrast and resolution as necessary. Setting Items for Sending Faxes 5. Tap Redial. The Redial screen is displayed. 6. Tap a recipient's number to redial. 7. Press the Color button for color transmission, or the Black button for black & white transmission.
Setting Items for Sending Faxes You can specify the settings of the scan contrast and the scan resolution on the Fax standby screen. Tap to specify the settings of the scan contrast and the scan resolution. • ScanRes. The following settings of the scan resolution are selectable. Standard Suitable for text-only documents. Fine Suitable for fine-print documents. Extra fine Suitable for detailed illustration or fine-print quality documents.
Sending Faxes Using Useful Functions Sending a Fax after Speaking on Telephone Sending a Fax to the Registered Recipient Sending the Same Document to Several Recipients (Sequential Broadcasting) Preventing Mistransmission of Faxes Using the On Hook Dial Function 813
Sending a Fax after Speaking on Telephone If you want to speak to the recipient before sending a fax, or if the recipient does not have a fax machine that can receive faxes automatically, send a fax manually after speaking to the recipient on the telephone to check whether the recipient can receive faxes. Important • It may be possible that faxes will reach unintended recipients due to the misdialing or incorrect registration of fax/telephone numbers.
8. When you hear a high-pitched signal, press the Color button or the Black button. Press the Color button for color transmission, or the Black button for black & white transmission. Important • Color transmission is available only when the recipient's fax machine supports color faxing. 9. Hang up the handset. Note • To cancel a fax transmission, press the Stop button. To cancel a fax transmission while it is in progress, press the Stop button, then follow the instructions on the touch screen.
Sending a Fax to the Registered Recipient Registering recipient's fax/telephone number and name in the machine's directory enables you to send faxes easily. Important • It may be possible that faxes will reach unintended recipients due to the misdialing or incorrect registration of fax/telephone numbers. When you send important documents, it is recommended that you send them after speaking on the telephone.
B. Tap to display the screen to select an initial. You can search the registered recipient by initial. By selecting the initial, the registered recipients are displayed in alphabetical order from the selected character. C. Tap to display the screen to select an ID number of the registered recipient. You can search the registered recipient by ID number. By enter the ID number and tapping OK, the registered recipients are displayed in order from the recipient of the ID number selected. D.
Sending the Same Document to Several Recipients (Sequential Broadcasting) This machine allows you to prepare for sending the same document to a maximum of 101 recipients in one operation. The recipients can be specified by entering the fax/telephone numbers and selecting the registered recipients (the particular recipient's number and the group dial) in combination. The following number of recipients can be specified in combination.
Specify the first recipient with the one of the following methods. • By specifying with the recipient registered to the machine: Tap Directory and specify the recipient. Sending a Fax to the Registered Recipient • By entering the fax/telephone numbers: Tap the entry field of fax/telephone numbers and enter the number. Sending Faxes by Entering Fax/Telephone Number Note • If FAX number re-entry in Security control under FAX settings is set to ON, enter the number again.
A. Adds the recipient from the registered recipients. B. Adds the recipient by entering the fax/telephone numbers if you added a first recipient from the registered recipients. C. Adds the recipient by selecting a number from the outgoing call logs if you added a first recipient from the registered recipients. 3. Add a recipient. Add a recipient according to the selected method. The Sequential broadcasting screen is displayed after specifying the multiple recipients. 4.
• If documents remain in the ADF after the Stop button is pressed while scanning is in progress, Document in ADF. Tap [OK] to eject document. is displayed on the touch screen. By tapping OK, the remaining documents are automatically ejected.
Preventing Mistransmission of Faxes This machine has two functions for preventing the mistransmission of faxes. • Sending faxes after entering the fax/telephone number twice This function requires you to re-enter the fax/telephone number after entering the number, so that the machine prevents you from misdialing.
Sending Faxes after Checking Information (Checking the Recipient's Information) Set Check RX FAX information to ON following the procedure below. Important • This function is not available when you send a fax manually. Sending a Fax after Speaking on Telephone 1. Make sure that the machine is turned on. 2. Flick the HOME screen, then tap Setup. Using the Operation Panel 3. Tap Device settings. 4. Tap FAX settings. 5. Tap Security control. 6. Tap Check RX FAX information. 7. Tap ON.
Using the On Hook Dial Function Follow the procedure below to send faxes with the on hook dial function. Important • It may be possible that faxes will reach unintended recipients due to the misdialing or incorrect registration of fax/telephone numbers. When you send important documents, it is recommended that you send them after speaking on the telephone. Sending a Fax after Speaking on Telephone • With manual transmission, you cannot use the platen glass to load documents. Load the documents in the ADF.
Sending Faxes by Entering Fax/Telephone Number Note • If FAX number re-entry in Security control under FAX settings is set to ON, enter the number again. Security control • Manual redialing: Tap Redial and select a number in the outgoing call logs. Manual Redialing 7. When you hear a high-pitched signal, press the Color button or the Black button. Press the Color button for color transmission, or the Black button for black & white transmission.
Registering Recipients Registering Recipients Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Registering Recipients Using Speed Dial Utility 826
Registering Recipients Using the Operation Panel of the Machine Registering recipients in the machine's directory in advance allows you to dial fax/telephone numbers simply. The following methods to register are available: • Recipient registration Registering the recipient's fax/telephone number and name allows you to send a fax by selecting a registered recipient in the machine directory.
Registering the Fax/Telephone Number of Recipients Before you can use the machine's directory, you need to register the recipients' fax/telephone numbers. Follow the procedure below to register the recipients' fax/telephone numbers. 1. Make sure that the machine is turned on. 2. Flick the HOME screen, then tap FAX. Using the Operation Panel The Fax standby screen is displayed. 3. Tap Function list. The Function list screen is displayed. 4. Tap TEL number registration. 5. Tap Directory registration.
The screen to register the recipient's fax/telephone number and name is displayed. Go to next step. • From outgoing call log When you select this registration method, the screen to select the fax/telephone number from the outgoing call logs is displayed. Selecting a fax/telephone number from the outgoing call logs, the screen to register the recipient's fax/telephone number and name is displayed. Go to next step.
The screen to enter the character is displayed. 2. Enter the recipient's name. 3. Tap OK. Note • You can enter the name up to 16 characters, including spaces. Entering Numbers, Letters, and Symbols 11. Enter the recipient's fax/telephone number. If you select a fax/telephone number on From outgoing call log or From incoming call log, the fax/ telephone number is already entered. If you do not change the fax/telephone number, go to next step. 1. Tap the entry field of fax/telephone numbers.
Note • To register another recipient's number and name, select an unregistered ID number and operate in the same procedure. • You can check the recipient's numbers and names you have registered by printing RECIPIENT TELEPHONE NUMBER LIST.
Registering Recipients in Group Dial If you register two or more registered recipients to a group dial, you can send the same document successively to all recipients registered to the group dial. 1. Make sure that the machine is turned on. 2. Flick the HOME screen, then tap FAX. Using the Operation Panel The Fax standby screen is displayed. 3. Tap Function list. The Function list screen is displayed. 4. Tap TEL number registration. 5. Tap Directory registration.
8. Enter the group name. 1. Tap the entry field of group name. The screen to enter the character is displayed. 2. Enter the group name. 3. Tap OK. Note • You can enter the name up to 16 characters, including spaces. Entering Numbers, Letters, and Symbols 9. Register the members. 1. Tap Add member. The machine's directory is displayed. Display by name Display by ID number A. Tap to switch the display by name and by ID number.
B. Tap to display the screen to select an initial. You can search the registered recipient by initial. By selecting the initial, the registered recipients are displayed in alphabetical order from the selected character. C. Tap to display the screen to select an ID number of the registered recipient. You can search the registered recipient by ID number. By enter the ID number and tapping OK, the registered recipients are displayed in order from the recipient of the ID number selected. D.
Repeat the procedure to register another member to the same group dial. 10. Tap Complete to finalize registration. Note • To register another group, select an unregistered ID number and operate in the same procedure. • You can check the recipients you have registered to the group dial by printing GROUP DIAL TELEPHONE NO. LIST.
Changing Registered Information To change information registered for recipient and group dial, follow the procedure below. 1. Make sure that the machine is turned on. 2. Flick the HOME screen, then tap FAX. Using the Operation Panel The Fax standby screen is displayed. 3. Tap Function list. The Function list screen is displayed. 4. Tap TEL number registration. 5. Tap Directory registration. 6. Tap a recipient or a group dial to change. 7. Change the registered information.
Deleting Registered Information To delete information registered for recipient and group dial, follow the procedure below. 1. Make sure that the machine is turned on. 2. Flick the HOME screen, then tap FAX. Using the Operation Panel The Fax standby screen is displayed. 3. Tap Function list. The Function list screen is displayed. 4. Tap TEL number registration. 5. Tap Directory registration. 6. Tap a recipient or a group dial to delete. 7. Delete the registered information.
Printing a List of the Registered Destinations You can print a list of the fax/telephone numbers and can keep it near the machine to refer to when dialing. 1. Make sure that the machine is turned on. 2. Load paper. 3. Flick the HOME screen, then tap FAX. Using the Operation Panel The Fax standby screen is displayed. 4. Tap Function list. The Function list screen is displayed. 5. Tap Print reports/lists. 6. Tap Directory list. 7. Tap an item to print.
Registering Recipients Using Speed Dial Utility About Speed Dial Utility Speed Dial Utility is a utility for forwarding the fax/telephone numbers registered on the machine to a computer and registering/changing them on the computer. In addition, you can register the fax/telephone number, user's name, user's fax/telephone number, and rejected numbers edited on the computer to the machine. You can also save them on the computer as a backup.
Starting Up Speed Dial Utility Before starting up Speed Dial Utility, confirm the following: • The necessary application software (MP Drivers and Speed Dial Utility) is installed. If MP Drivers or Speed Dial Utility is not yet installed, install them with the Setup CD-ROM or install them from our website. • The machine is connected to a computer correctly. Make sure that the machine is connected to the computer correctly.
Speed Dial Utility Dialog box The following items are on the Speed Dial Utility dialog box. 1. Printer Name: Selects the machine for editing the registered information using Speed Dial Utility. 2. Display Printer Settings Loads the registered information on the machine selected for Printer Name: into Speed Dial Utility. 3. Setting Item List: Selects the registered information for editing. Choose one item from TEL Number Registration, User Information Setting, and Rejected Number Setting. 4.
7. Instructions Displays this guide. 8. Exit Quits Speed Dial Utility. Information registered or edited using Speed Dial Utility is neither saved on the computer nor registered on the machine. 9. Save to PC... Saves information edited using Speed Dial Utility on the computer. 10. Register to Printer Registers information edited using Speed Dial Utility to the machine.
Saving Registered Information on the Machine to Your Computer Follow the procedure below to save the recipients' name, recipients' fax/telephone number, group dial, user's name, user's fax/telephone number, or rejected numbers that registered on the machine to the computer. 1. Start up Speed Dial Utility. 2. Select the machine from the Printer Name: list box, then click Display Printer Settings. 3. Click Save to PC.... 4. Enter the file name on the displayed screen, then click Save.
Registering a Fax/telephone Number Using Speed Dial Utility Follow the procedure below to register fax/telephone numbers. Note • Before you register fax/telephone numbers using Speed Dial Utility, make sure that no fax operations are in progress. 1. Start up Speed Dial Utility. 2. Select the machine from the Printer Name: list box, then click Display Printer Settings. 3. Click TEL Number Registration from Setting Item List:. The list of registered fax/telephone numbers is displayed. 4.
1. Enter the group name. 2. Select the code you want to add to the group dial, then click Add >>. Note • You can only enter numbers that have already been registered. 6. Click OK. To continue registering fax/telephone numbers or a group dial, repeat steps 4 to 6. • To save the registered information on the computer. 1. Click Save to PC.... 2. Enter the file name on the displayed screen, then click Save. • To register the registered information to the machine: 1. Click Register to Printer. 2.
Changing a Fax/telephone Number Using Speed Dial Utility Follow the procedure below to change fax/telephone numbers. Note • Before you change fax/telephone numbers using Speed Dial Utility, make sure that no fax operations are in progress. 1. Start up Speed Dial Utility. 2. Select the machine from the Printer Name: list box, then click Display Printer Settings. 3. Click TEL Number Registration from Setting Item List:. The list of registered fax/telephone numbers is displayed. 4.
To add a member: Select the code to add to the group dial, then click Add >>. To delete a member: Select the code to delete from the group dial, then click << Delete. 5. Click OK. To continue changing fax/telephone numbers or group dials, repeat steps 4 and 5. • To save the edited information on the computer. 1. Click Save to PC.... 2. Enter the file name on the displayed screen, then click Save. • To register the edited information to the machine: 1. Click Register to Printer. 2.
Deleting a Fax/telephone Number Using Speed Dial Utility Follow the procedure below to delete fax/telephone numbers. Note • Before you delete fax/telephone numbers using Speed Dial Utility, make sure that no fax operations are in progress. 1. Start up Speed Dial Utility. 2. Select the machine from the Printer Name: list box, then click Display Printer Settings. 3. Click TEL Number Registration from Setting Item List:. The list of registered fax/telephone numbers is displayed. 4.
Changing Sender Information Using Speed Dial Utility Follow the procedure below to change the user's name or fax/telephone number. 1. Start up Speed Dial Utility. 2. Select the machine from the Printer Name: list box, then click Display Printer Settings. 3. Click User Information Setting from Setting Item List:. The user's information is displayed. 4. Select an item to change, then click Edit.... The User Information dialog box is displayed. 5.
Registering/Changing Rejected Number Using Speed Dial Utility Follow the procedure below to register, change, or delete rejected numbers. 1. Start up Speed Dial Utility. 2. Select the machine from the Printer Name: list box, then click Display Printer Settings. 3. Click Rejected Number Setting from Setting Item List:. The list of rejected numbers is displayed. • To register a rejected number: 1. Select an unoccupied code from the list, then click Edit.... 2.
Calling the Registered Information Up from Your Computer and Registering the Information to the Machine You can register the fax/telephone numbers, user's name, user's fax/telephone number, and rejected numbers saved on the computer to the machine. 1. Start up Speed Dial Utility. 2. Select the machine from the Printer Name: list box, then click Display Printer Settings. 3. Click Load from PC.... 4. Select the RSD file (*.rsd) to register to the machine. 5. Click Open on the dialog box. 6.
Uninstalling Speed Dial Utility Follow the procedure below to uninstall Speed Dial Utility. Important • Log into a user account with administrator privilege. 1. Perform the uninstalling process. • In Windows 8.1 or Windows 8: 1. Select Control Panel from the Settings charm on Desktop > Programs > Programs and Features. 2. Select Canon Speed Dial Utility from the program list, then click Uninstall. If the User Account Control screen appears, click Continue. • In Windows 7 or Windows Vista: 1.
Receiving Faxes Receiving Faxes Changing the Paper Settings Memory Reception Receiving Faxes Using Useful Functions 853
Receiving Faxes This section describes the preparation necessary for receiving a fax and how to receive a fax. Preparing for Receiving a Fax Prepare for receiving a fax according to the following procedure. 1. Make sure that the machine is turned on. 2. Flick the HOME screen, then tap FAX. Using the Operation Panel The Fax standby screen is displayed. 3. Make sure of the receive mode setting. Make sure of the receive mode setting displayed on the Fax standby screen.
Setting the Receive Mode • You can specify the advanced settings of each receive mode. For details on the advanced settings of the receive mode: Advanced Settings of Receive Mode • If the machine was not able to print a received fax, the machine stores the unprinted fax temporarily in its memory (memory receiving).
• Set the machine to enable you to initiate fax reception from a connected telephone (remote reception). Remote Reception • When the answering machine is connected to the machine: • If the answering machine is set to the answering mode, select User-friendly RX: ON in Advanced. If the call is a fax, the machine will receive the fax automatically. • If the answering mode is turned off on the answering machine, pick up the handset.
Note • If a telephone is connected to the machine, the telephone will ring when a call incomes. • You can change the number of times to ring the telephone with Ring count in Advanced. When DRPD or Network switch is selected: • When the call is a fax: The telephone will ring when a call incomes. The machine will receive the fax automatically when the fax ring pattern is detected. Note • You can change the number of times to ring the telephone.
The name of this service varies depending on the country or region of purchase. This setting may not be also available depending on the country or region of purchase.
Changing the Paper Settings This machine prints received faxes to paper loaded in the machine beforehand. You can use the operation panel to change the paper settings for printing faxes. Make sure that the settings are appropriate for the loaded paper. Important • If the size of loaded paper is different from that specified in the paper size setting, the received faxes are stored in the machine's memory and Check the page size and tap [OK]. is displayed on the touch screen.
A. Page size Select the page size from A4, Letter, or Legal. B. Type (Media type) The paper type is set to Plain paper. C. Paper src (Paper source) Select the cassette to feed paper. Selecting Cassette (auto) allows the machine to feed paper from the cassette 2 when the cassette 1 runs out of paper under the following conditions. • A4, Letter, or Legal sized plain paper is loaded in the cassette 1 and cassette 2. • Yes is selected for Auto feed switch in Cassette settings. D.
Memory Reception If the machine was not able to print the received fax, the received fax is stored in the machine's memory. The FAX Memory lamp is lit and Received in memory. is displayed at the Fax standby screen. Important • If you unplug the power cord, all faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted. The next time you turn the machine on, tap OK after a confirmation screen is displayed. The list of the faxes deleted from the machine's memory (MEMORY CLEAR REPORT) will be printed.
Load the paper and tap OK on the touch screen. ◦ A different size of paper from that specified by Page size in FAX paper settings is loaded: Load the same size of paper as that specified by Page size in FAX paper settings, then tap OK on the touch screen. • You pressed the Stop button to cancel printing of a fax: Press the HOME button and tap FAX to resume printing of the fax. Note • The machine can store up to max. 250 pages* (max. 30 documents) of faxes in the machine's memory. * When using ITU-T No.
Receiving Faxes Using Useful Functions Saving Received Faxes Automatically on a USB Flash Drive Forwarding Received Faxes Automatically to Shared Folder on the Computer Remote Reception Rejecting Fax Reception Using the Caller ID Service to Reject Calls 863
Saving Received Faxes Automatically on a USB Flash Drive You can save received faxes on a USB flash drive as PDF files automatically when receiving a fax. This section describes the procedure to enable the machine to save received faxes on a USB flash drive automatically. Important • Do not remove the USB flash drive from the machine when the machine is set to save received faxes on a USB flash drive automatically.
• If the USB flash drive is removed or becomes full while saving faxes is in progress, the error message is displayed on the touch screen. Tap OK to dismiss the error. • The folder and file name of faxes saved on the USB flash drive is as follows: • Folder name: CANON_SC\FAXDOC\0001 • File name (file extension: PDF): Running numbers, starting from FAX_0001 • File date: The date and time of saving as set in the machine.
Forwarding Received Faxes Automatically to Shared Folder on the Computer You can forward received faxes to the shared folder on the computer as PDF files automatically. This section describes the procedure to enable the machine to forward received faxes to the shared folder on the computer automatically. Important • Do not disconnect the machine with the computer when the machine is set to forward received faxes to the shared folder on the computer automatically.
9. Select a shared folder. Note • When you specify a PIN code for a registered folder, a screen asking you to enter a PIN code is displayed. Entering the PIN code allows you to assign the shared folder as the destination. Note • You can forward up to 250 pages of fax as one PDF file. • You can forward up to 2000 PDF files to the shared folder on the computer.
Remote Reception If the machine is located away from the telephone, pick up the handset of the telephone connected to the machine and dial 25 (the remote reception ID) to receive faxes (remote reception). • If you use a rotary pulse line, temporarily switch your telephone to tone dialing. For details on how to switch to tone dialing, refer to your telephone's instruction manual.
Rejecting Fax Reception You can set the machine to reject faxes with no sender information or those from specific senders. Select one of the following conditions to reject faxes. • Faxes with no caller identification. • Faxes from senders not registered in the machine's directory. • Faxes from senders registered in the machine as rejected numbers. Select a fax rejection condition following the procedure below. 1. Make sure that the machine is turned on. 2. Flick the HOME screen, then tap Setup.
1. When the confirmation screen to register the rejected number is displayed, tap Yes. 2. Select a registration number. 3. Select a registration method. Register the rejected number depending on the registration method. • By entering the number When you select this registration method, the screen to register the fax/telephone number is displayed. Tap the entry field of fax/telephone numbers to display the screen to enter the fax/telephone number.
Note • This registration method may not be available depending on the country or region of purchase. 4. Tap Register to finalize registration. Note • To register another rejected number, select another registration number, then register the rejected number. You can register up to 10 rejected numbers. • You can print the list of rejected numbers (REJECTED NUMBER LIST). Summary of Reports and Lists • To change the registered rejected number: 1. Select a registered rejected number you want to change. 2.
Using the Caller ID Service to Reject Calls If you subscribe to the Caller ID service, the machine detects the sender's Caller ID. If the sender's ID matches the condition specified in this setting, the machine rejects the phone call or fax reception from the sender. Note • This setting may not be supported depending on the country or region of purchase. Contact your telephone company to confirm whether it provides this service. Specify the setting following the procedure below. 1.
Note • Even if you select Reject, the machine rings once. (The machine may not ring depending on the country or region of purchase.
Other Useful Fax Functions Using the Information Services Transmission/Reception of Faxes Using ECM Document Stored in Machine's Memory Summary of Reports and Lists 874
Using the Information Services You can use various information services such as provided by banks, and make airline reservations or hotel reservations. Since these services require tone dialing to use their services, you need to temporarily switch to tone dialing if your machine is connected to a rotary pulse line. Using the Touch Tone Line Using the Rotary Pulse Line Important • You may need to contract with the service providers for some information services. For details, contact the service providers.
3. Lift the handset of the telephone. 4. Use the telephone to dial the number of the information service. 5. When the recorded message for the information service answers, use the telephone to press the numbers in accordance with the message. 6. Hang up the handset to finish using the service. Using the Rotary Pulse Line • Dialing by Using the On Hook Dial Function Note • You can use the on hook dial function only when Hook key setting in Security control under FAX settings is set to Enable.
3. Lift the handset of the telephone. 4. Use the telephone to dial the number of the information service. 5. When the recorded message for the information service answers, use the telephone to switch to tone dialing. When you dial the number of the information service using the telephone connected to the machine, you cannot use the machine to switch to tone dialing. For instructions on how to switch to tone dialing, refer to your telephone's instruction manual. 6.
Transmission/Reception of Faxes Using ECM This machine is set to send/receive faxes in Error Correction Mode (ECM). If the recipient's fax machine is compatible with ECM, ECM automatically corrects errors and resends the fax. Note • If the sender's or recipient's fax machine is not compatible with ECM, the fax will be sent/received without automatic error correction. • To receive color faxes, make sure that ECM RX in Adv. communication settings in Advanced FAX settings under FAX settings is set to ON.
Document Stored in Machine's Memory If the sending faxes is not complete or the machine was not able to print the received faxes, these faxes are stored in the machine's memory. If an error occurred during a fax transmission, the document is not stored in the machine's memory. In the following cases, the machine is not able to print the received fax and will automatically store the fax in its memory. • The amount of remaining ink is insufficient to print a fax. • Paper has run out.
Printing a Document in Machine's Memory You can print a specified document in the machine's memory or print all the documents in its memory at a time. When printing a specified document, you specify it by its transaction number. If you do not know the transaction number for your target document, print the list of documents (MEMORY LIST) first. 1. Make sure that the machine is turned on. 2. Load paper. 3. Flick the HOME screen, then tap FAX. Using the Operation Panel The Fax standby screen is displayed.
• To print the memory list (MEMORY LIST): You can print a list of the documents in the machine's memory by tapping Print doc. list. When the print confirmation screen is displayed, tap Yes. The printing starts. MEMORY LIST shows the transaction number of the unsent or unprinted fax (TX/RX NO.), transaction mode, recipient's number, and the date and time of the transaction. A transaction number from "0001" to "4999" on MEMORY LIST indicates a document being sent.
Deleting a Document in Machine's Memory You can delete a specified document in the machine's memory or delete all the documents in its memory at a time. Note • When deleting a specified document, you specify it by its transaction number. If you do not know the transaction number for your target document, print the list of documents (MEMORY LIST) first. Printing a Document in Machine's Memory 1. Make sure that the machine is turned on. 2. Flick the HOME screen, then tap FAX.
• To specify a document to delete: Select a document to delete on the Memory list screen, tap Delete specified doc.. Note • If the specified document is not stored in the machine's memory, There is no document that can be deleted. is displayed. Tap OK to return to the previous screen. The confirmation screen is displayed. If you select Yes, the specified document is deleted from machine's memory. • To delete all documents stored in the machine's memory: Tap Batch process then tap Delete all documents.
Saving a Document in Machine's Memory to USB Flash Drive You can save the received faxes stored in the machine's memory to the USB flash drive as PDF files using the operation panel of the machine. You can save a specified document in the machine's memory to the USB flash drive or save all the documents in its memory to the USB flash drive at a time. Important • Do not remove the USB flash drive from the machine until saving is complete.
A. Date and time of transaction and fax/telephone number B. Transaction number (TX/RX NO.) A transaction number from "0001" to "4999" indicates a document being sent. A transaction number from "5001" to "9999" indicates a document being received. C. Color information Color is displayed for color transmission/reception. Nothing is displayed for black & white transmission/reception. Note • If no document is stored in the machine's memory, There is no document in memory. is displayed.
• File date: The date and time of saving as set in the machine.
Forwarding a Document in Machine's Memory to Shared Folder on the Computer You can forward the received faxes stored in the machine's memory to the shared folder on the computer as PDF files using the operation panel of the machine. You can forward a specified document in the machine's memory to the shared folder on the computer or forward all the documents in its memory to the shared folder on the computer at a time.
A. Date and time of transaction and fax/telephone number B. Transaction number (TX/RX NO.) A transaction number from "0001" to "4999" indicates a document being sent. A transaction number from "5001" to "9999" indicates a document being received. C. Color information Color is displayed for color transmission/reception. Nothing is displayed for black & white transmission/reception. Note • If no document is stored in the machine's memory, There is no document in memory. is displayed.
Note • You can forward up to 250 pages of fax as one PDF file. • You can forward up to 2000 PDF files on a USB flash drive. • Faxes are forwarded according to the order of the transaction number when Save all RX documents is selected. • If the machine is disconnected with the computer or if the writing error occurs on the computer while forwarding faxes is in progress, the error message is displayed on the touch screen. Tap OK to dismiss the error.
Summary of Reports and Lists The machine prints the report of sending or receiving a fax automatically. You can print the list of the fax/ telephone number or the current settings. Type of Reports and Lists Printing Report or List Type of Reports and Lists Report or List Description ACTIVITY REPORT Shows recent fax transactions at sight. • You can print ACTIVITY REPORT manually. For details on the procedure to print, see Printing Report or List.
• At the time of purchase, ERROR TX REPORT is set to be printed only when a transmission error occurred. You can set the machine to print TX REPORT each time it sends a document, or disable printing of the report by selecting TX report in Auto print settings under FAX settings. You can also specify the print setting so that the first page of the fax is printed along with the report. Auto print settings Note • The first page of the fax is not printed in color transmission.
• CALLER HISTORY Note • CALLER HISTORY may not be supported depending on the country or region of purchase. 1. Make sure that the machine is turned on. 2. Load paper. 3. Flick the HOME screen, then tap FAX. Using the Operation Panel The Fax standby screen is displayed. 4. Tap Function list. The Function list screen is displayed. 5. Tap Print reports/lists. 6. Select a report or a list you want to print to start printing. • When you select Directory list: Select Recipient or Group dial.
You cannot send a document longer than 15.75 inches / 400 mm from the ADF. "#003" is also printed if it takes time to send a page. Divide the document or set the image quality (Fax resolution) to a lower setting, then resend it. #005 No answer. The recipient's fax machine does not respond. Contact the recipient and have the recipient check that the telephone line is connected correctly. #012 No paper is in the recipient's fax machine. There is no paper in the recipient's fax machine.
Errors When You Receive a Fax If an error occurs when you receive a fax, the error number is printed on RX REPORT or ACTIVITY REPORT (there are some errors for which the cause is also printed). The causes corresponding to the error numbers are as follows. No. Cause Action #003 It takes too long to receive a page. Contact the sender and have the sender divide the fax or set the image quality (Fax resolution) to a lower setting and resend it. #005 No answer.
Sending Faxes from a Computer Sending a FAX (Fax Driver) Basic Creating an Address Book (Fax Driver) Edit or Remove a Recipient from an Address Book (Fax Driver) Search for a Recipient in an Address Book (Fax Driver) Troubleshooting Problems Sending Faxes (Fax Driver) How to Open the Setting Screen of the Fax Driver General Notes (Fax Driver) 895
Sending a FAX (Fax Driver) You can send faxes using the fax driver from applications that support document printing. Note • Only black and white transmission is supported. 1. Make sure that the machine is turned on. 2. Open the document you want to fax with an application (such as Notepad), and then click the Print command. (The command is Print... on the File menu.) 3. In Select Printer or Name in the Print dialog box, select Canon XXX series FAX (where "XXX" is the model name). 4. Click Print or OK.
6. Select a recipient from Recipient Name in the Select Recipient from Address Book dialog box, then click Set as Recipient. The selected recipient is reflected in Recipient in the Send FAX dialog box. Important • You cannot specify a recipient if there is no recipient registered in the address book. Register the recipient in the address book and reopen the address book. For details on how to register recipients in the address book, see "Creating an Address Book (Fax Driver).
• You can register the recipient you entered to the address book by clicking Add to Address Book.... For details on how to register recipients in the address book, see "Creating an Address Book (Fax Driver)." • Add the outside line access number before the fax number as needed. (Example: When the outside line access number is "0" and the fax number is "XXX-XXXX", enter "0XXX-XXXX".) 7. Click Send Now. When a confirmation message is displayed, click OK.
Creating an Address Book (Fax Driver) By using the address book, you can send a fax by simply specifying a recipient from it. You can register the recipient's name, fax number and other information in the address book. Registering a recipient (WAB contact) in the address book You can register an individual recipient (Contact) in the address book. 1. Open the print settings dialog box of the fax driver. 2. Click Address Book... in the displayed dialog box.
4. Select Contact in the New Entry dialog box, then click OK. Note • For faxing, you can only specify the Contact (one recipient). You cannot specify a Distribution List. 5. Enter the First, Middle, and Last of the contact in the Name and E-mail tab (Name tab when using Windows XP) on the Properties dialog box. The recipient's name will be printed at the top of the fax received by the recipient.
6. Enter the fax number on the Home or Work tab, then click OK. An individual recipient (Contact) is registered in the address book. Note • You can also register a recipient by clicking the Add to Address Book... button on the Send FAX dialog box after entering the recipient. • Add the outside line access number before the fax number as needed. (Example: When the outside line access number is "0" and the fax number is "XXX-XXXX", enter "0XXX-XXXX".
3. From the Start menu, select XXXX (user name), then double-click AppData > Roaming > Canon > MP5 to open the folder. 4. Double-click the ".wab" file. The address book will be reflected in Windows Vista automatically.
Setup when Opening the Address Book for the First Time (Windows XP) In Windows XP, when you open the address book for the first time, the Setup Windows Address Book dialog box will be displayed and you can set the Windows Address Book you want to use. To Create a New Windows Address Book (WAB File) Exclusively for Faxing: Select Create a new Windows Address Book file for faxing., then click OK. To Use an Existing Windows Address Book: Click Select existing Windows Address Book file.
How to Open the Setting Screen of the Fax Driver The following explains how to display the print settings dialog box or the Properties dialog box of the fax driver from your application or from the fax/printer icon. Opening the Print Settings Dialog Box of the Fax Driver from an Application 1. Click the Print command in the application. In general, you can open the Print dialog box by selecting Print from the File menu. 2. Select "your model name," then click Preferences (or Properties).
2. Right-click the Canon XXX series FAX icon (where "XXX" is the model name) and select Printing Preferences.... Opening the Properties Dialog Box of the Fax Driver from the Fax/Printer Icon • Windows 8.1/Windows 8: 1. Click the Settings charm > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and Printers. 2. Right-click the Canon XXX series Printer icon or Canon XXX series FAX icon and select Printer Properties, then Canon XXX series FAX. (Where "XXX" is the model name.) • Windows 7: 1.
Edit or Remove a Recipient from an Address Book (Fax Driver) You can change the recipients' names, fax numbers and other information, or delete recipients registered in the address book. Editing Recipients in an address book 1. Open the print settings dialog box of the fax driver. 2. Click Address Book... in the displayed dialog box. 3. Select the recipient you want to edit from the Address Book dialog box, then click Properties.... 4.
Removing Recipients from an address book 1. Open the print settings dialog box of the fax driver. 2. Click Address Book... in the displayed dialog box. 3. Select the recipient you want to delete from the Address Book dialog box, then click Delete.
4. When a confirmation message is displayed, click Yes.
Search for a Recipient in an Address Book (Fax Driver) You can search for recipients registered in the address book by name. 1. Open the document you want to fax with an application (such as Notepad), and then click the Print command. (The command is Print... on the File menu.) 2. In Select Printer or Name in the Print dialog box, select Canon XXX series FAX (where "XXX" is the model name). 3. Click Print or OK. * Print dialog box in Notepad 4. Click Display Address Book...
If the entered name is found, the recipient will be displayed in the contact list with its name selected. While the name is selected, click Set as Recipient to enter it as the recipient. Important • You cannot search by criteria other than name.
Troubleshooting Problems Sending Faxes (Fax Driver) Check 1 Is the power turned on? You cannot send faxes if the power is turned off. Press the ON button to turn the power on. If you disconnected the power cord without turning off the power (one of the buttons on the operation panel is lit), reconnecting it turns on the power.
Check 7 Does a printer error occur? Check if a message is displayed on the LCD monitor. If a support code is displayed, see "Support Code List" for your model from Home of the Online Manual. If no support code is displayed, see "A Message Is Displayed" for your model from Home of the Online Manual. If you are in a hurry, press the Stop button to close the message, then send the fax. Check 8 Is the telephone line connected correctly? Reconnect the telephone line cable to the telephone line jack.
General Notes (Fax Driver) This fax driver is subject to the following restrictions. Keep the following points in mind when using the fax driver. • The fax driver may not work correctly when sending a Microsoft Excel 2002 document as a fax with the Allow A4/Letter Paper Resizing option checked in Microsoft Excel 2002. Follow the instructions below to solve the problem: 1. Click Options... from the Tools menu. 2. Uncheck the Allow A4/Letter Paper Resizing option on the International tab.
Troubleshooting The Machine Cannot Be Powered On Printing Does Not Start Paper Does Not Feed Properly/"No Paper" Error Occurs Print Results Not Satisfactory Ink Is Not Ejected Paper Jams If an Error Occurs Problems Sending Faxes Problems Receiving Faxes Search Each Function Problems with Network Communication Problems with Printing Problems with Printing Quality Problems with Scanning Problems with Faxing Problems with the Machine Problems with Installation/Downloading About Errors/Messages Displayed If Yo
Problems with Network Communication Problems with the Machine While Using with Network Cannot Detect a Machine on a Network Other Problems with Network 915
Problems with the Machine While Using with Network The Machine Stopped Working Suddenly Ink Remaining Level Is Not Displayed on Printer Status Monitor of the Machine Printing Speed Is Slow Cannot Use the Machine on Replacing an Access Point or Changing Its settings 916
The Machine Stopped Working Suddenly Cannot Communicate with the Machine After the Network Settings Are Changed Cannot Communicate with the Machine over the Wireless LAN Cannot Communicate with the Machine Using the Access Point Mode Cannot Communicate with the Machine over the Wired LAN Cannot Print, Scan, or Fax from a Computer Connected to the Network Cannot Communicate with the Machine After the Network Settings Are Changed It may take a while for the computer to obtain the IP address, or you may need
For the procedures to connect a network device to the computer and set them up, refer to the instruction manual of your network device or contact its manufacturer. Make sure that the radio status is good and adjust the installation positions while monitoring the radio status with IJ Network Tool. Check7 Monitoring Wireless Network Status Check8 Make sure that a valid wireless channel is used. The wireless channel to be used may be limited depending on wireless network devices installed in the computer.
Cannot Communicate with the Machine Using the Access Point Mode Check1 Make sure that the machine is turned on. Is Change LAN in LAN settings under Device settings set to Disable LAN, Wireless LAN active, or Wired LAN active? Check2 Select Access point mode active. Is the machine selected to connect external communication devices (e.g. computers, smartphones, or tablets)? Check3 Select an access point name (SSID) specified for the machine as a destination for external communication devices.
If the problem is not resolved, perform setup with the Setup CD-ROM or perform it according to the instructions on our website. Cannot Print, Scan, or Fax from a Computer Connected to the Network Check1 Make sure that the network settings of the computer are correct. For the procedures to set up the computer, refer to the instruction manual of your computer or contact its manufacturer. Check2 If the MP Drivers are not installed, install them.
Ink Remaining Level Is Not Displayed on Printer Status Monitor of the Machine Use the printer driver with bidirectional communication. Select Enable bidirectional support in the Ports sheet of the properties dialog box of the printer driver.
Printing Speed Is Slow Check1 The machine may be printing out a large job issued from another computer. Check2 When using wireless LAN, make sure that the radio status is good and adjust the installation positions while monitoring the radio status with IJ Network Tool. Monitoring Wireless Network Status Make sure that there is no barrier or obstacle between the access point and the machine. Wireless communication between different rooms or floors is generally poor.
Cannot Use the Machine on Replacing an Access Point or Changing Its settings When you replace an access point, perform network setup of the machine again. Perform network setup again with the Setup CD-ROM or perform it again according to the instructions on our website. If the problem is not resolved, see below.
When Encryption Is Enabled, Cannot Communicate With the Machine After the Encryption Type Was Switched on the Access Point If the machine cannot communicate with the computer after the encryption type of the machine was switched, make sure that encryption types for the computer and the access point matches that set to the machine.
Cannot Detect a Machine on a Network Cannot Detect the Machine When Setting up Network Communication The Machine Cannot Be Detected in the Wireless LAN The Machine Cannot Be Detected in the Wired LAN Note • You cannot use the wireless LAN and the wired LAN at the same time.
Cannot Detect the Machine When Setting up Network Communication If the machine could not be detected on the network when setting up the network communication, confirm the network settings before redetecting the machine. Cannot Detect the Machine during Wireless LAN Setup: Check 1 Cannot Detect the Machine during Wired LAN Setup: Check 1 Note • You can set up the network communication via USB.
Cannot Detect the Machine during Wireless LAN Setup: Check 1 Are the machine and network device (router, access point, etc.) turned on? Make sure that the machine is turned on. Confirming that the Power Is On Make sure that the network device (router, access point, etc.) is turned on. If the machine or the network device is turned off: Turn on the machine or the network device. After turning on the machine or the network device, it may take some time until ready for use.
Cannot Detect the Machine during Wireless LAN Setup: Check 2 Is the wireless LAN setting of the machine enabled? Make sure that the or icon below is displayed on the touch screen. If the icon is not displayed: The wireless LAN setting of the machine is disabled. Enable the wireless LAN setting of the machine. After enabling the wireless LAN setting, click Back to Top on the Check Printer Settings screen to try to set up the network communication from the beginning.
Cannot Detect the Machine during Wireless LAN Setup: Check 3 Is the machine connected to the access point? By using the icon on the touch screen, make sure that the machine is connected to the access point. If the icon is displayed: The machine may be placed far away from the access point. Place the machine near the access point temporarily, then click Redetect on the Check Printer Settings screen.
Cannot Detect the Machine during Wireless LAN Setup: Check 4 Are the SSID of the access point connected to your computer and that connected to the machine the same? You can confirm the SSID of the access point connected to the machine on the touch screen. Select Setup on the HOME screen, then select Device settings > LAN settings > Confirm LAN settings > WLAN setting list. From your computer, you can confirm the SSID of the access point connected to your computer. In Windows 8.
Cannot Detect the Machine during Wireless LAN Setup: Check 5 Does the firewall function of your security software or operation system for computer interfere with setting up the network communication? The firewall function of your security software or operation system for computer may limit communications between the machine and your computer. Confirm the setting of firewall function of your security software or operation system or the message appearing on your computer.
Cannot Detect the Machine during Wireless LAN Setup: Check 6 Check the settings of the access point. Check the settings of the access point for the network connection such as IP address filtering, MAC address filtering, or DHCP function. Make sure that the radio channel of the access point and that assigned to the machine are the same. For details on how to check the settings of the access point, refer to the instruction manual supplied with the access point or contact its manufacturer.
Cannot Detect the Machine during Wired LAN Setup: Check 1 Is the LAN cable connected, and are the machine and the router turned on? Make sure that the LAN cable is connected. Make sure that the machine is turned on. Confirming that the Power Is On Make sure that the router is turned on. If the LAN cable is connected and the machine or the network device is turned off: Turn on the machine or the network device. After turning on the machine or the network device, it may take some time until ready for use.
Cannot Detect the Machine during Wired LAN Setup: Check 2 Are the computer and the router configured and can the computer connect to the network? Make sure that you can view any web pages on your computer. If you cannot view any web pages: Click Cancel on the Check Printer Settings screen to cancel to set up the network communication. After that, configure the computer and network device.
Cannot Detect the Machine during Wired LAN Setup: Check 3 Is the wired LAN setting of the machine enabled? Make sure that the icon is displayed on the touch screen. If the icon is not displayed: The wired LAN setting of the machine is disabled. Enable the wired LAN setting of the machine. After enabling the wired LAN setting, click Back to Top on the Check Printer Settings screen to try to set up the network communication from the beginning. If the icon is displayed: Go to check 4.
Cannot Detect the Machine during Wired LAN Setup: Check 4 Is the machine connected to the router? By using the operation panel of the machine, make sure that the machine is connected to the router. Select Setup on the HOME screen, then select Device settings > LAN settings > Confirm LAN settings > LAN setting list. Make sure that Connection on the touch screen is set to Active. If Connection is set to Inactive: The machine is not connected to the router. Connect the machine to the router.
Cannot Detect the Machine during Wired LAN Setup: Check 5 Does the firewall function of your security software or operation system for computer interfere with setting up the network communication? The firewall function of your security software or operation system for computer may limit communications between the machine and your computer. Confirm the setting of firewall function of your security software or operation system or the message appearing on your computer.
Cannot Detect the Machine during Wired LAN Setup: Check 6 Check the settings of the router. Check the settings of the router for the network connection such as IP address filtering, MAC address filtering, or DHCP function. For details on how to check the settings of the router, refer to the instruction manual supplied with the router or contact its manufacturer. After checking the settings of the router, click Redetect on the Check Printer Settings screen.
The Machine Cannot Be Detected in the Wireless LAN Check1 Make sure that the machine is turned on. Check2 Is Change LAN in LAN settings under Device settings set to Disable LAN? Check3 When the machine is connected to the computer temporarily using a USB cable, make sure that the USB cable is connected properly.
If a device (e.g. microwave oven) using the same frequency bandwidth as the wireless station is placed nearby, the device may cause interference. Place the wireless station as far away from the interference source as possible. Check11 Make sure that the network settings of the computer are correct. Make sure that the computer can communicate with the access point over the wireless LAN.
The Machine Cannot Be Detected in the Wired LAN Check1 Make sure that the machine is turned on. Check2 Is Change LAN in LAN settings under Device settings set to Disable LAN? LAN settings Check3 Make sure that the LAN cable is connected properly. Make sure that the machine is connected to the router with the LAN cable. If the LAN cable is loose, connect the cable properly. If the LAN cable is connected to the WAN side of the router, connect the cable to the LAN side of the router.
Other Problems with Network Forgot an Access Point Name, SSID, or a Network Key The Message Is Displayed on the Computer Screen During Setup The Administrator Password Set to the Machine Was Forgotten Checking Information about the Network Packets Are Sent Steadily How to Restore the Machine's Network Settings to Factory Default 942
Forgot an Access Point Name, SSID, or a Network Key Cannot Connect with an Access Point to Which a WEP or WPA/WPA2 Key Is Set (You Forgot the WEP or WPA/WPA2 Key) How to Set an Encryption Key Cannot Connect with an Access Point to Which a WEP or WPA/WPA2 Key Is Set (You Forgot the WEP or WPA/WPA2 Key) For information on how to set up the access point, refer to the instruction manual provided with the access point or contact its manufacturer.
Either TKIP (basic encryption) or AES (secure encryption) is selected automatically for the dynamic encryption method. For details, see Changing the WPA/WPA2 Detailed Settings. Note • This machine supports WPA/WPA2-PSK (WPA/WPA2-Personal) and WPA2-PSK (WPA2Personal).
The Message Is Displayed on the Computer Screen During Setup The Enter Password Screen Is Displayed During Setup The Screen for Setting the Encryption Is Displayed After Selecting the Access Point in the Search Screen "You are connecting the machine to the non encrypted wireless network" Is Displayed The Enter Password Screen Is Displayed During Setup The following screen is displayed if an administrator password is set to the machine which has already been set up to use via a network.
Security is not configured on the access point. The machine can still be used, so continue the setup procedure to complete it. Important • If you connect to a network that is not protected with security measures, there is a risk of disclosing data such as your personal information to a third party.
The Administrator Password Set to the Machine Was Forgotten Initialize the machine settings. Select Reset all, then the administrator password reverts to the default. Reset setting After initializing the machine settings, perform setup with the Setup CD-ROM or perform it according to the instructions on our website.
Checking Information about the Network Checking the IP Address or the MAC Address of the Machine Checking the IP Address or the MAC Address of the Computer Checking If the Computer and the Machine, or Computer and the Access Point Can Communicate Checking the Network Setting Information Checking the IP Address or the MAC Address of the Machine To check the IP address or the MAC address of the machine, display the network setting information using the operation panel of the machine or print out the network
To check that communication is available, perform the ping test. 1. Select Command Prompt as shown below. • In Windows 8.1 or Windows 8, select Command Prompt from the Start screen. If Command Prompt is not displayed on the Start screen, select the Search charm, then search for "Command Prompt". • In Windows 7, Windows Vista, or Windows XP, click Start > All Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt. 2.
Packets Are Sent Steadily While IJ Network Scanner Selector EX is enabled, it periodically transmits packets to check whether it can communicate with the machine over the network. When using the computer in a network environment other than the one used to set up the machine, disable IJ Network Scanner Selector EX. icon on the notification area on the To disable IJ Network Scanner Selector EX, right-click the desktop, then select Disable Canon IJ Network Scanner Selector EX.
How to Restore the Machine's Network Settings to Factory Default Important • Note that initialization erases all network settings on the machine, and printing, scanning, or faxing operation from a computer over network may become impossible. To use the machine over network, perform setup with the Setup CD-ROM or perform it according to the instructions on our website. Initialize the network setting using the operation panel of the machine.
Problems with Printing Printing Does Not Start Paper Jams Paper Does Not Feed Properly/"No Paper" Error Occurs Cannot Print Properly with Automatic Duplex Printing Copying/Printing Stops Before It Is Completed 952
Printing Does Not Start Make sure that the power plug is securely plugged in, then press the ON button Check1 to turn the machine on. While the POWER lamp is flashing, the machine is initializing. Wait until the POWER lamp stops flashing and remains lit. Note • When printing large data such as a photo or graphics, it may take longer to start printing. While the POWER lamp is flashing, the computer is processing data and sending it to the machine. Wait until printing starts.
Deleting the Undesired Print Job Make sure that your machine's name is selected in the Print dialog box. Check6 The machine will not print properly if you are using a printer driver for a different printer. Make sure that "Canon XXX series Printer" (where "XXX" is your machine's name) is selected in the Print dialog box. Note • To make the machine the one selected by default, select Set as Default Printer. Check7 Configure the printer port appropriately.
If the problem is not resolved, reinstall the MP Drivers with the Setup CD-ROM or install them from our website. • Printing does not start even though the port named "CNBJNP_xxxxxxxxxx" is selected when the machine is used over LAN: Launch IJ Network Tool, and select "CNBJNP_xxxxxxxxxx" as you confirmed in step 4, then associate the port with the printer using Associate Port in the Settings menu. If the problem is not resolved, reinstall the MP Drivers with the Setup CD-ROM or install them from our website.
Paper Jams When paper is jammed, a troubleshooting message is displayed automatically. Take the appropriate action described in the message. • When a Support Code and a message are displayed on the computer screen: • When a Support Code and a message are displayed on the touch screen: For details on how to remove the jammed paper, refer to Support Code List (When Paper Is Jammed).
Paper Does Not Feed Properly/"No Paper" Error Occurs Check1 Make sure that paper is loaded. Loading Paper Check2 Make sure of the following when you load paper. • When loading two or more sheets of paper, flip through the paper before loading. In addition, when you load paper with some paper remaining in the cassette, flip through the remaining paper and the newly loaded paper before loading. • When loading two or more sheets of paper, align the edges of the sheets before loading.
Once you have prepared the envelopes, load them in portrait orientation. If the envelopes are placed in landscape orientation, they will not feed properly. Confirm that the media type and the paper size settings correspond with the loaded paper. Check5 Check6 Clean the paper feed roller. Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller Note • Cleaning the paper feed roller will wear the roller, so perform this procedure only when necessary.
Cannot Print Properly with Automatic Duplex Printing Check1 Is the setting for automatic duplex printing selected? Make sure that the Duplex Printing and Automatic check boxes are selected on the Page Setup sheet in the printer driver setup window. Duplex Printing Check2 Make sure that the actual size of the paper is suitable for automatic duplex printing. The sizes of media suitable for automatic duplex printing are A4 and Letter. Load paper of suitable size, then tap OK on the touch screen.
Copying/Printing Stops Before It Is Completed Check1 Is the paper loaded? Make sure that paper is loaded. If the machine has run out of paper, load paper. Check2 Do the printing documents have lots of photographs or illustrations? As printing large data such as photos or graphics takes time for the machine and the computer to process, the machine may appear to have stopped operating.
Problems with Printing Quality Print Results Not Satisfactory Ink Is Not Ejected 961
Print Results Not Satisfactory If the print result is not satisfactory due to white streaks, misaligned lines, or uneven colors, confirm the paper and print quality settings first. Check1 Do the page size and media type settings match the size and type of the loaded paper? When these settings are incorrect, you cannot obtain a proper print result. If you are printing a photograph or an illustration, incorrect paper type settings may reduce the quality of the printout color.
Back of the Paper Is Smudged Colors Are Uneven or Streaked 963
Cannot Print to End of Job Check1 Select the setting not to compress the printing data. If you select the setting not to compress the printing data with an application software you are using, the printing result may be improved. Click Print Options on the Page Setup sheet on the printer driver. Select the Do not allow application software to compress print data check box, then click OK. * Deselect the check box after printing is complete.
Part of the Page Is Not Printed Check When performing automatic duplex printing, the reason below is possible. When performing automatic duplex printing, the printable area at the top of the page will be 0.08 inches / 2 mm narrower than the usual. For this reason, the bottom of the page may not be printed. To prevent this, select the setting to reduce printing from the printer driver. Important • Reduced printing may affect the layout depending on your document.
No Printing Results/Printing Is Blurred/Colors Are Wrong/White Streaks No Printing Results Printing Is Blurred Colors Are Wrong 966
White Streaks Check1 Did you confirm the paper and print quality settings? Print Results Not Satisfactory Check2 Check the status of ink tanks. Replace the ink tank if the ink has run out. Replacing an Ink Tank Print the Nozzle Check Pattern and perform any necessary maintenance operations such as Print Head Cleaning. Check3 Print the Nozzle Check Pattern to determine whether the ink ejects properly from the print head nozzles.
• When copying, see also the sections below: Check5 Is the platen glass or the glass of ADF dirty? Clean the platen glass or the glass of ADF. Cleaning the Platen Glass and Document Cover Note • If the glass of ADF is dirty, black streaks appear on the paper as shown below. Check6 Check that the original is loaded correctly on the platen glass or in the ADF.
Lines Are Misaligned Check1 Did you confirm the paper and print quality settings? Print Results Not Satisfactory Check2 Perform Print Head Alignment. If printed lines are misaligned or print results are otherwise unsatisfactory, adjust the print head position. Aligning the Print Head Note • If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Alignment, perform Print Head Alignment manually referring to Aligning the Print Head Manually.
Line Does Not Print or Prints Partially Check1 Is the Page Layout Printing performed or the Binding margin function used? When the Page Layout Printing or Binding margin function is being used, thin lines may not be printed. Try thickening the lines in the document. Check2 Is the size of the print data extremely large? Click Print Options on the Page Setup sheet on the printer driver. Then, set Prevention of Print Data Loss in the displayed dialog to On.
Image Does Not Print or Prints Partially Check1 Select the setting not to compress the printing data. If you select the setting not to compress the printing data with an application software you are using, the printing result may be improved. Click Print Options on the Page Setup sheet on the printer driver. Select the Do not allow application software to compress print data check box, then click OK. * Deselect the check box after printing is complete.
Printed Paper Curls or Has Ink Blots Printed Paper Has Ink Blots Printed Paper Curls Check1 Did you confirm the paper and print quality settings? Print Results Not Satisfactory Check2 If the intensity is set high, reduce the intensity setting and try printing again. If you are using plain paper to print images with high intensity, the paper may absorb too much ink and become wavy, causing paper abrasion. • When printing from your computer You can confirm the intensity using the printer driver.
Paper Is Smudged/Printed Surface Is Scratched Paper Is Smudged The Edges of Paper Are Smudged Printed Surface Is Smudged Printed Surface Is Scratched Check1 Did you confirm the paper and print quality settings? Print Results Not Satisfactory Check2 Is the appropriate type of paper used? Check to see if the paper you are printing on is suitable for your printing purpose. Media Types You Can Use Check3 Load the paper after correcting its curl.
1. Roll up the paper in the opposite direction to the paper curl as shown below. 2. Check that the paper is now flat. We recommend printing curl-corrected paper one sheet at a time. Note • Depending on the media type, the paper may be smudged or may not be fed properly even if it is not curled inward. In such cases, follow the procedure described below to curl the paper outward within 0.1 inch / 3 mm (B) in height before printing. This may improve the print result.
If you are using plain paper to print images with high intensity, the paper may absorb too much ink and become wavy, causing paper abrasion. • When printing from your computer Reduce the intensity setting in the printer driver and try printing again. 1. Open the printer driver setup window. How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window 2. On the Main sheet, select Manual for Color/Intensity, and then click Set.... 3. Drag the Intensity slide bar on the Color Adjustment sheet to adjust the intensity.
Note • To prevent the inside of the machine from stains, set the paper size correctly. Check10 Set the time to dry the printed surface longer. Doing so gives the printed surface enough time to dry so that paper smudged and scratched are prevented. 1. Make sure that the machine is turned on. 2. Open the printer driver setup window. How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window 3. Click the Maintenance tab and then Custom Settings. 4.
Back of the Paper Is Smudged Check1 Did you confirm the paper and print quality settings? Print Results Not Satisfactory Check2 Perform the Bottom Plate Cleaning to clean the inside of the machine. Cleaning the Inside of the Machine (Bottom Plate Cleaning) Note • When performing duplex printing or too much printing, the inside may become stained with ink.
Colors Are Uneven or Streaked Colors Are Uneven Colors Are Streaked Check1 Did you confirm the paper and print quality settings? Print Results Not Satisfactory Print the Nozzle Check Pattern and perform any necessary maintenance operations such as Print Head Cleaning. Check2 Print the Nozzle Check Pattern to determine whether the ink ejects properly from the print head nozzles.
Perform the Print Head Deep Cleaning. If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Deep Cleaning, turn off the machine and perform another Print Head Deep Cleaning after 24 hours. When you turn the machine off, do not unplug it from the power supply. • If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Deep Cleaning twice: If Print Head Deep Cleaning does not resolve the problem, the print head may be damaged. Contact the service center. Check3 Perform Print Head Alignment.
Ink Is Not Ejected Check1 Has the ink run out? Check the Support Code on the touch screen and take the appropriate action to resolve the error. Support Code List Check2 Are the print head nozzles clogged? Print the Nozzle Check Pattern to determine whether the ink ejects properly from the print head nozzles. Refer to When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect for the Nozzle Check Pattern printing, Print Head Cleaning, and Print Head Deep Cleaning.
Problems with Scanning Problems with Scanning Scan Results Not Satisfactory Software Problems 981
Problems with Scanning Scanner Does Not Work ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Does Not Start Error Message Appears and the ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screen Does Not Appear Cannot Scan Multiple Items at One Time Slow Scanning Speed "There is not enough memory.
Scanner Does Not Work Check 1 Make sure that your scanner or printer is turned on. Check 2 Connect the USB cable to a different USB port on the computer. Check 3 If the USB cable is connected to a USB hub, remove it from the USB hub and connect it to a USB port on the computer. Check 4 Restart the computer.
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Does Not Start Check 1 Make sure that MP Drivers is installed. If not installed, install MP Drivers from the Setup CD-ROM or the web page. Check 2 Select your scanner or printer on the application's menu. Important • If your scanner or printer name is displayed multiple times, select the one that does not include WIA. Note • The operation may differ depending on the application. • Use the WIA driver when scanning from a WIA-compliant application.
Error Message Appears and the ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screen Does Not Appear Check 1 Make sure that your scanner or printer is turned on. Check 2 Turn off your scanner or printer, then reconnect the USB cable and replug the power cord. Check 3 Connect the USB cable to a different USB port on the computer. If the USB cable is connected to a USB hub, remove it from the USB hub and connect it to a USB port on the computer. Check 4 Check 5 Make sure that MP Drivers is installed.
Cannot Scan Multiple Items at One Time Check 1 Make sure that the items are placed correctly. Placing Items (When Scanning from a Computer) Check 2 Check if you can properly scan one item. Some applications do not support multiple image scanning. In that case, scan each item individually.
Slow Scanning Speed Check 1 To view the image on a monitor, set the output resolution to around 150 dpi. To print, set it to around 300 dpi. Resolution Check 2 Set Fading Correction, Grain Correction, etc. to None. Refer to "Image Settings" for your model from Home of the Online Manual for details. In IJ Scan Utility, deselect the Correct slanted text document / Detect the orientation of text document and rotate image checkbox and scan again.
"There is not enough memory." Message Is Displayed Check 1 Exit other applications and try again. Check 2 Reduce the resolution or output size and scan again.
Computer Stops Operating during Scanning Check 1 Restart the computer, reduce the output resolution in ScanGear (scanner driver) and scan again. Refer to "Output Settings" for your model from Home of the Online Manual for details. Check 2 Delete unnecessary files to obtain sufficient free hard disk space, then scan again. Error message may appear if there is not enough hard disk space to scan and save, when the image size is too large (such as when scanning a large item at high resolution).
Scanner Does Not Work after Upgrading Windows Check Disconnect the USB cable, then uninstall (delete) and reinstall MP Drivers and IJ Scan Utility. Step 1: Uninstall MP Drivers. Refer to "Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers" for your model from Home of the Online Manual for how to delete MP Drivers. Step 2: Uninstall IJ Scan Utility. • Windows 8.1 / Windows 8: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click the Settings charm > Control Panel > Programs > Programs and Features. Double-click Canon IJ Scan Utility.
Step 3: Reinstall MP Drivers and IJ Scan Utility. Reinstall MP Drivers and IJ Scan Utility from the Setup CD-ROM or the web page.
Scanned Image Does Not Open Check If the data format is not supported by the application, scan the image again and select a popular data format such as JPEG when saving it. Refer to the application's manual for details. If you have any questions, contact the manufacturer of the application.
Scan Results Not Satisfactory Moire Appears in Scan Results Scan Quality (Image Displayed on the Monitor) Is Poor Scanned Image Is Surrounded by Extra White Areas Cannot Scan at the Correct Size Position or Size of the Image Cannot be Detected Correctly When Scanning from the Operation Panel Item Is Placed Correctly, but the Scanned Image Is Slanted Scanned Image Is Enlarged (Reduced) on the Computer Monitor 993
Moire Appears in Scan Results Check 1 Increase the scanning resolution. Resolution Check 2 Take the following measures and scan again. • Set one of the following settings in the Settings (Document Scan) dialog box, Settings (Custom Scan) dialog box, Settings (Scan and Stitch) dialog box, Settings (OCR) dialog box or Settings (E-mail) dialog box of IJ Scan Utility, then scan from the IJ Scan Utility main screen.
Scan Quality (Image Displayed on the Monitor) Is Poor Check 1 If the image is jagged, increase the scanning resolution, or select TIFF or PNG in Data Format of the Settings dialog box. Resolution Settings Dialog Box Check 2 Set the display size to 100 %. Some applications do not display images clearly if the display size is too small. Check 3 If moire (stripe pattern) appears, take the following measures and scan again.
• On the Advanced Mode tab of ScanGear, set Image Adjustment in Image Settings to None. Refer to "Image Settings" for your model from Home of the Online Manual for details. • On the Color Settings tab in the Preferences dialog box of ScanGear, set Color Matching. Refer to "Color Settings Tab" for your model from Home of the Online Manual for details.
Scanned Image Is Surrounded by Extra White Areas Check Specify the scan area. Click (Auto Crop) in whole image view of ScanGear (scanner driver) to automatically display the cropping frame (scan area) according to the item size. You can also manually specify the scan area in thumbnail view or when there are white margins along the item (for example, in photos), or when you want to create custom cropping frames.
Cannot Scan at the Correct Size Check Make sure that the items are placed correctly.
Position or Size of the Image Cannot be Detected Correctly When Scanning from the Operation Panel Check 1 Make sure that the items are placed correctly. Placing Items (When Scanning from a Computer) Check 2 Check that the settings match the item to be scanned. If you cannot scan properly by automatically detecting the item type, specify the item type and size.
Item Is Placed Correctly, but the Scanned Image Is Slanted Check When Document or Magazine is selected for Select Source, deselect the Correct slanted text document checkbox and scan the item again.
Scanned Image Is Enlarged (Reduced) on the Computer Monitor Check 1 Change the display setting in the application. Refer to the application's manual for details. If you have any questions, contact the manufacturer of the application. Note • You cannot reduce the image size in Paint. To reduce the display size, open the images in an application. Check 2 Change the resolution setting in ScanGear (scanner driver) and scan again. The higher the resolution, the larger the resulting image will be.
Software Problems The E-mail Client You Want to Use Does Not Appear in the Screen for Selecting an E-mail Client 1002
The E-mail Client You Want to Use Does Not Appear in the Screen for Selecting an E-mail Client Check Check that the e-mail client's MAPI is enabled. Refer to the e-mail client's manual for how to set MAPI. If the problem is not solved even when MAPI is enabled, select None (Attach Manually) in the screen for selecting an e-mail client, then manually attach the image to the outgoing e-mail.
Problems with Faxing Problems Sending Faxes Problems Receiving Faxes Cannot Send a Fax Clearly Telephone Problems 1004
Problems Sending Faxes Cannot Send a Fax Cannot Perform Sequential Broadcasting by Redialing, or Cannot Dial by Entering the Numbers Errors Often Occur When You Send a Fax Cannot Send a Fax Check1 Is the power turned on? • You cannot send faxes if the power is turned off. Press the ON button to turn the power on. • If you unplugged the power cord without turning off the power (the POWER lamp is lit), reconnecting it turns on the power automatically.
Check5 Is Hook key setting set to Disable? When you send a fax manually, dial the number with Enable selected for Hook key setting in Security control under FAX settings, or dial the number using the telephone connected to the machine. Security control Check6 Is Dial tone detect set to ON? Resend the fax after a while. If you still cannot send the fax, select OFF for Dial tone detect in Advanced FAX settings under FAX settings.
If the telephone line is connected correctly, there is a problem with your telephone line. Contact your telephone company and the manufacturer of your terminal adapter or telephone adapter.
Problems Receiving Faxes Cannot Receive a Fax, Cannot Print a Fax Machine Does Not Switch Automatically between Voice and Fax Calls Quality of Received Fax is Poor Cannot Receive a Color Fax Errors Often Occur When You Receive a Fax Cannot Receive a Fax, Cannot Print a Fax Check1 Is the power turned on? • You cannot receive faxes if the power is turned off. Press the ON button to turn the power on.
• Print ACTIVITY REPORT and check for an error. Summary of Reports and Lists Check4 Is the telephone line cable connected to the external device jack? Reconnect it to the telephone line jack. Basic Connection Is a different size of paper from that specified by Page size in FAX paper settings loaded? Check5 If a different size of paper from that specified by Page size is loaded for printing faxes, the received faxes will not be printed and will be stored in the machine's memory (Memory Reception).
For details on how to set, see Rejecting Fax Reception. Are there setting items set Reject in Caller rejection? Check10 If you select Reject for any setting items in Caller rejection in Security control under FAX settings, the machine rejects calls for setting item selected Reject. For details on how to set, see Using the Caller ID Service to Reject Calls.
• Select ON for ECM RX in Adv. communication settings in Advanced FAX settings under FAX settings. Advanced FAX settings • Contact the sender and ask the sender to check whether the machine is set to enable ECM transmission. If the sender's or recipient's fax machine is not compatible with ECM, the fax will be sent/received without automatic error correction. • Reduce the reception start speed on RX start speed in Adv. communication settings in Advanced FAX settings under FAX settings.
Cannot Send a Fax Clearly Check1 Is the document loaded correctly? Remove the document, then reload it on the platen glass or in the ADF. Loading Originals Is the platen glass and/or the inner side of the document cover and/or the glass of ADF dirty? Check2 Clean the platen glass and/or the inner side of the document cover and/or the glass of ADF, then reload the document.
Telephone Problems Cannot Dial Telephone Disconnects During a Call Cannot Dial Check1 Is the telephone line cable connected correctly? Check that the telephone line cable is connected correctly. Basic Connection Check2 Is the telephone line type of the machine or the external device set correctly? Check the telephone line type setting and change it as necessary.
Problems with the Machine The Machine Cannot Be Powered On Cannot Connect to Computer with a USB Cable Properly Cannot Communicate with the Machine with USB Connection The Display on the Touch Screen Cannot Be Seen At All An Unintended Language Is Displayed on the Touch Screen Print Head Holder Does Not Move to the Position for Replacing Printer Status Monitor Is Not Displayed 1014
The Machine Cannot Be Powered On Check1 Press the ON button. Check2 Make sure that the power plug is securely plugged into the power cord connector of the machine, then turn it back on. Check3 Unplug the machine from the power supply, then plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on after leaving it for at least 2 minutes. If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center.
Cannot Connect to Computer with a USB Cable Properly Printing or Scanning Speed Is Slow/Hi-Speed USB Connection Does Not Work/"This device can perform faster" Message Is Displayed If your system environment is not fully compatible with Hi-Speed USB, the machine will operate at a lower speed provided under USB 1.1. In this case, the machine operates properly but printing or scanning speed may slow down due to communication speed.
Cannot Communicate with the Machine with USB Connection Check1 Make sure that the machine is turned on. Check2 Make sure that the USB cable is connected properly. See Connecting the Machine to the Computer Using a USB Cable to connect the USB cable properly. Check3 Do not start up IJ Network Tool while printing. Check4 Do not print while IJ Network Tool is running. Make sure that Enable bidirectional support is selected in the Ports sheet of the properties dialog box of the printer driver.
The Display on the Touch Screen Cannot Be Seen At All • If the POWER lamp is off: The machine is not powered on. Connect the power cord and press the ON button. • If the POWER lamp is lit: The touch screen may be in the screen-saver mode. Tap the touch screen.
An Unintended Language Is Displayed on the Touch Screen Select the language you want to be displayed according to the following procedure. 1. Press the HOME button and wait for about 5 seconds. 2. Flick the HOME screen, then tap Setup. Using the Operation Panel 3. Tap Device settings. 4. Tap the fifth setting item from the top. 5. Tap the language for the touch screen.
Print Head Holder Does Not Move to the Position for Replacing Important • The print head holder moves to the position for replacing only when an ink tank runs out of ink. If no ink tanks run out of ink, the print head holder does not move even though you open the front cover. Check1 Is the POWER lamp off? Check if the POWER lamp is lit. The print head holder will not move unless the power is on. If the POWER lamp is off, close the front cover and turn the machine on.
Printer Status Monitor Is Not Displayed Check Is the printer status monitor enabled? Make sure that Enable Status Monitor is selected on the Option menu of the printer status monitor. 1. Open the printer driver setup window. How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window 2. On the Maintenance sheet, click View Printer Status. 3. Select Enable Status Monitor on the Option menu if it is not selected.
Problems with Installation/Downloading Cannot Install the MP Drivers Easy-WebPrint EX Does Not Start Up or Easy-WebPrint EX Menu Does Not Appear How to Update MP Drivers in Network Environment Uninstalling IJ Network Tool 1022
Cannot Install the MP Drivers • If the installation does not start even after the Setup CD-ROM is inserted into your computer's disc drive: Start the installation following the procedure below. 1. Select items as shown below. ◦ In Windows 8.1 or Windows 8, select the Explorer icon in Taskbar on Desktop, then select Computer from the list on the left. ◦ In Windows 7 or Windows Vista, click Start then Computer. ◦ In Windows Vista, click Start then Computer. ◦ In Windows XP, click Start then My Computer. 2.
• If you are unable to proceed beyond the Printer Connection screen: Note • The printer is not detected. Check the connection. may be displayed depending on the computer you use. Check1 Make sure that the USB cable is securely plugged in to the machine and the computer. Check2 Follow the procedure below to connect the machine and the computer again. 1. Turn the machine off. 2. Unplug the USB cable from the machine and the computer, then connect it again. 3. Turn the machine on.
• In other cases: Reinstall the MP Drivers. If the MP Drivers were not installed correctly, uninstall the MP Drivers, restart your computer, and then reinstall the MP Drivers. Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers If you reinstall the MP Drivers, install the MP Drivers with the Setup CD-ROM or install them from our website. Note • If the installer was forced to be terminated due to a Windows error, the system may be in an unstable condition and you may not be able to install the drivers.
Easy-WebPrint EX Does Not Start Up or Easy-WebPrint EX Menu Does Not Appear If Easy-WebPrint EX does not start up or its menu does not appear on Internet Explorer, confirm the following. Check1 Is Canon Easy-WebPrint EX displayed on the Toolbars menu in the Internet Explorer's View menu? If Canon Easy-WebPrint EX is not displayed, Easy-WebPrint EX is not installed on your computer. Install the latest Easy-WebPrint EX onto your computer from our website.
How to Update MP Drivers in Network Environment Download the latest MP Drivers in advance. To obtain the latest MP Drivers, access our web site through the Internet and download the latest MP Drivers for your model. After uninstalling the MP Drivers, install the latest MP Drivers according to the regular procedure.
Uninstalling IJ Network Tool Follow the procedure below to uninstall IJ Network Tool from your computer. Important • Even if IJ Network Tool is uninstalled, you can print and fax over network or scan from the computer. However, you cannot change the network settings over network. • Log into a user account with administrator privilege. 1. Perform the procedure to uninstall IJ Network Tool. • In Windows 8.1 or Windows 8: 1.
About Errors/Messages Displayed If an Error Occurs A Message for Faxing Is Displayed on the Fax Standby Screen A Message Is Displayed 1029
If an Error Occurs When an error occurs in printing such as the machine is out of paper or paper is jammed, a troubleshooting message is displayed automatically. Take the appropriate action described in the message. When an error occurs, a Support Code (error number) is displayed on the computer screen or the touch screen.
A Message for Faxing Is Displayed on the Fax Standby Screen If a message is displayed on the Fax standby screen, take the corresponding action described below. Message Action Auto redial The machine is waiting to redial the recipient's number because the line was busy or the recipient did not answer when you tried to send a document. Wait for the machine to automatically redial the number.
If the ink has already run out, we recommend that Do not print be selected for Received documents in Auto print settings under FAX settings to store the received fax in the machine's memory. After you replace the ink tank and select Print for Received documents in Auto print settings, the fax stored in the machine's memory will be printed automatically. Auto print settings • Paper has run out: Load the paper and tap OK on the touch screen.
Document Stored in Machine's Memory When sending a fax, resend it. If this message still appears, delete the faxes stored in the machine's memory, divide the faxes for sending, and send them again. When receiving a fax, have the sender resend the faxes. Awaiting document processing. • The received faxes were not saved on the USB flash drive automatically because the USB flash drive was not inserted or because it was not writable. The received faxes are stored in the machine's memory.
A Message Is Displayed This section describes some of the errors or messages. Note • A Support Code (error number) is displayed on the computer or on the touch screen for some error or message. For details on errors with Support Codes, refer to Support Code List. If a message is displayed on the touch screen, see below. • A Message Is Displayed on the touch screen If a message is displayed on the computer, see below.
• Characters other than machine name or IJ Scan Utility are displayed on Created with on the Details screen. • "?" is displayed on the preview screen. ◦ Data edited or processed on a computer must be printed from the computer. • The specified PDF file contains unprintable data. Some portions may not be printed. PDF file which contain lot of graphics or hi-resolution images may lose that data or stop before printing is completed. In this case, print from the computer. • Check the page size and tap [OK].
See Cannot Print Properly with Automatic Duplex Printing and take the appropriate action. Check Error Regarding the Power Cord Being Unplugged Is Displayed The power cord may have been unplugged while the machine was still on. Check the error message that appears on the computer, then click OK. The machine starts printing. See Notice for Unplugging the Power Cord for unplugging the power cord. Important • If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
Make sure that a port named "USBnnn" (where "n" is a number) with "Canon XXX series Printer" appearing in the Printer column is selected for Print to the following port(s). Note • When the machine is used over LAN, the port name of the machine is displayed as "CNBJNP_xxxxxxxxxx". "xxxxxxxxxx" is the character string generated from the MAC address or a character string specified by the user when setting up the machine.
If the User Account Control screen is displayed, follow the on-screen instructions. • In Windows 8.1 or Windows 8, select Control Panel from the Settings charm on Desktop > Hardware and Sound > Device Manager. • In Windows 7 or Windows Vista, click Control Panel, Hardware and Sound, then Device Manager. • In Windows XP, click Control Panel, Performance and Maintenance, System, then click Device Manager on the Hardware sheet. 2. Double-click Universal Serial Bus controllers then USB Printing Support.
• If you agree to participate in the survey program: Click Agree, then follow the on-screen instructions. The printer usage information will be sent via the Internet. If you have followed the on-screen instructions, the information will be sent automatically from the second time onward and the confirmation screen will not be displayed again. Note • When the information is being sent, a caution screen such as an Internet security screen may be displayed.
Note • In Windows 8.1, Windows 8, Windows 7, or Windows Vista, a confirmation/warning dialog box may appear when installing, uninstalling or starting up software. This dialog box appears when administrative rights are required to perform a task. If you are logged on to an administrator account, follow the on-screen instructions. 2. Select Canon Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program. 3. Select Change.
If You Cannot Resolve the Problem If you cannot resolve the problem with any of the workarounds in this chapter, please contact the seller of the machine or the service center. Canon support staff are trained to be able to provide technical support to satisfy customers. Caution • If the machine emits any unusual sound, smoke, or odor, turn it off immediately. Unplug the power cord from the outlet and contact the seller or the service center. Never attempt to repair or disassemble the machine yourself.
Support Code List The support code appears on the touch screen and the computer screen when an error occurs. "Support Code" means the error number and appears with an error message. When an error occurs, check the support code displayed on the touch screen or the computer screen and take the appropriate action.
• 7000 to 2ZZZ 7100 7200 7201 7202 7203 7204 7205 7300 • 9000 to 2ZZZ 9000 9500 • A000 to ZZZZ B202 B203 B204 B502 B503 B504 C000 About the support code for paper jam, you can also refer to Support Code List (When Paper Is Jammed).
Support Code List (When Paper Is Jammed) If the paper is jammed, remove it following the procedure appropriate for each case.
1300 Cause Paper is jammed inside the front cover. Action If the paper is jammed inside the front cover, remove the paper following the procedure below. Important • The power cannot be turned off while the machine is sending or receiving a fax, or when the received fax or the unsent fax are stored in the machine's memory. Make sure that the machine has completed sending or receiving all the faxes before unplugging the power cord.
3. Hold the jammed paper with your hands. If the paper is rolled up, pull it out. 4. Pull the paper slowly not to tear it, then pull the paper out.
5. Make sure that all the jammed paper is removed. If the paper is torn, a piece of paper may remain inside the machine. Check the following and remove the piece of paper if it remains. • Does the piece of paper remain under the print head holder? • Does the little piece of paper remain inside the machine? • Does the piece of paper remain in the right side or the left side space (C) inside the machine? 6. Close the front cover. 7. Reload the paper, and tap OK on the touch screen of the machine.
paper may remain inside the machine. In this case, confirm that no piece of paper remains inside the machine. • We recommend you use paper other than A5 sized one to print documents with photos or graphics; otherwise, the printout may curl and cause paper exit jams. If you cannot remove the paper or the paper tears inside the machine, or if the paper jam error continues after removing the paper, contact the service center.
1303 Cause Paper is jammed inside the rear cover. Action If the paper is jammed inside the rear cover, remove the paper following the procedure below. Important • The power cannot be turned off while the machine is sending or receiving a fax, or when the received fax or the unsent fax are stored in the machine's memory. Make sure that the machine has completed sending or receiving all the faxes before unplugging the power cord.
4. Pull out the paper slowly. Note • Do not touch the inner parts of the machine. • If you cannot pull the paper out, try the following. • Turn the machine off and turn it back on. The paper may be ejected automatically. • Pull out the paper output tray. It becomes easy to pull out the paper. 5. Close the rear cover slowly. Close the rear cover then slide it to the right. Slide the rear cover so that the mark on the rear cover aligns with the mark on the machine. 6.
After clearing the paper jam error and tapping OK on the touch screen of the machine, the machine resumes printing from the page where the paper was jammed. • If the paper is jammed while printing from a computer or copying in progress: After clearing the paper jam error and tapping OK on the touch screen of the machine, then the machine resumes printing from the next page where the paper was jammed. As the page where the paper was jammed is not printed, reprint if necessary.
1313 Cause The paper is jammed inside the rear cover as the machine pulled in the printed paper. Action If the paper is jammed inside the rear cover as the machine pulled in the printed paper, remove the paper following the procedure below. Important • If the printed paper piles up on the paper output slot, the machine may pull it in and the paper is jammed inside the machine. Remove the printed paper from the paper output tray before it amounts to 75 sheets.
3. Open the rear cover. Slide the rear cover to the left then open it. 4. Pull out the paper slowly. Note • Do not touch the inner parts of the machine. • If you cannot pull the paper out, try the following. • Turn the machine off and turn it back on. The paper may be ejected automatically. • Pull out the paper output tray. It becomes easy to pull out the paper. 5. Close the rear cover slowly. Close the rear cover then slide it to the right.
• If the paper is jammed while printing the faxes or the fax report in progress: After clearing the paper jam error and tapping OK on the touch screen of the machine, the machine resumes printing from the page where the paper was jammed. • If the paper is jammed while printing from a computer or copying in progress: After clearing the paper jam error and tapping OK on the touch screen of the machine, then the machine resumes printing from the next page where the paper was jammed.
1314 Cause Paper is jammed inside the rear cover when performing automatic duplex printing. Action If the paper is jammed inside the rear cover when performing automatic duplex printing, remove the paper following the procedure below. Important • The power cannot be turned off while the machine is sending or receiving a fax, or when the received fax or the unsent fax are stored in the machine's memory.
4. Pull out the paper slowly. Note • Do not touch the inner parts of the machine. • If you cannot pull the paper out, try the following. • Turn the machine off and turn it back on. The paper may be ejected automatically. • Pull out the paper output tray. It becomes easy to pull out the paper. 5. Close the rear cover slowly. Close the rear cover then slide it to the right. Slide the rear cover so that the mark on the rear cover aligns with the mark on the machine. 6.
After clearing the paper jam error and tapping OK on the touch screen of the machine, the machine resumes printing from the page where the paper was jammed. • If the paper is jammed while printing from a computer or copying in progress: After clearing the paper jam error and tapping OK on the touch screen of the machine, then the machine resumes printing from the next page where the paper was jammed. As the page where the paper was jammed is not printed, reprint if necessary.
2801 Cause The document is jammed in the ADF. Action Remove the document following the procedure below. Important • The power cannot be turned off while the machine is sending or receiving a fax, or when the received fax or the unsent fax are stored in the machine's memory. Make sure that the machine has completed sending or receiving all the faxes before unplugging the power cord. If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
5. Close the document feeder cover, then turn on the machine. When rescanning the document after clearing the error, rescan it from the first page. If you cannot remove the document or the document tears inside the machine, or if the document jam error continues after removing the document, contact the service center. Note • The document may not feed properly depending on the media type, or your environment, such as when the temperature and humidity are either too high or too low.
In Other Cases Make sure of the following: Check1 Are there any foreign objects around the paper output slot? Check2 Are the rear cover attached properly? Check3 Is the paper curled? Load the paper after correcting its curl.
1007 Cause Possible causes include the following. • There is no paper in the cassette 1. • Paper is not loaded in the cassette 1 properly. Action Take the corresponding actions below. • Load paper in the cassette 1. • Align the paper guides with the both edges of the paper when you load paper in the cassette 1. After carrying out the above measures, tap OK on the touch screen to dismiss the error. Note • The loadable paper differs depending on the paper source.
1008 Cause Possible causes include the following. • There is no paper in the cassette 2. • Paper is not loaded in the cassette 2 properly. Action Take the corresponding actions below. • Load paper in the cassette 2. • Align the paper guides with the both edges of the paper when you load paper in the cassette 2. After carrying out the above measures, tap OK on the touch screen to dismiss the error. Important • The loadable paper differs depending on the paper source.
1200 Cause The front cover is open. Action Close the front cover and wait for a while. Do not close it while you are replacing an ink tank.
1310 Cause The size of paper may not be compatible with automatic duplex printing. Action The sizes of media suitable for auto duplex printing are A4 and Letter. Make sure that the size of the paper loaded in the machine is correct. Tapping OK on the touch screen will eject the paper and restart printing from the front side of the next paper. The reverse side of the ejected sheet will not be printed.
1575 Cause Ink cannot be correctly detected. Action If an ink tank becomes empty, replace it. An ink tank cannot be replaced until it becomes empty. Please be advised that Canon shall not be liable for any malfunction or trouble caused by continuation of printing under the ink out condition.
1600 Cause Ink may have run out. Action Replacing the ink tank is recommended. If printing is in progress and you want to continue printing, tap OK on the machine with the ink tank installed. Then printing can continue. Replacing the ink tank is recommended after the printing. The machine may be damaged if printing is continued under the ink out condition.
1660 Cause The ink tank is not installed. Action Install the ink tank.
1688 Cause The ink has run out. Action Replace the ink tank and close the front cover. Printing under the current condition may damage the machine. If you want to continue printing in this condition, you need to release the function for detecting the remaining ink level. Press and hold the machine's Stop button for at least 5 seconds, and then release it. With this operation, releasing the function for detecting the remaining ink level is memorized.
1700 Cause The ink absorber is almost full. Action Tap OK on the touch screen to continue printing. Contact the service center.
1701 Cause The ink absorber is almost full. Action Tap OK on the touch screen to continue printing. Contact the service center.
1754 Cause The ink tank is not installed properly. Action Open the front cover. Then push the ink tank. After installing the ink tank properly, close the front cover. If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center. Important • The ink tank that was once installed cannot be removed until the ink runs out.
1755 Cause The ink has run out. Action To maintain both machine and print quality, the machine cannot continue printing under the ink out condition. Cancel printing and replace the ink tank before printing again. Important • Do not remove an ink tank until a new one is prepared to be installed. • Once you remove an ink tank, the machine will not operate until a new one is installed. • Once you remove an ink tank, the machine will not operate even if the removed ink tank is just reinstalled.
1872 Cause The cassette 1 is not inserted. Action Insert the cassette 1. Note • The cassette paper information registration screen is displayed after inserting the cassette 1. Register the cassette paper information according to the paper you loaded in the cassette 1. • If you want to cancel printing, press the machine's Stop button.
1873 Cause The cassette 2 is not inserted. Action Insert the cassette 2. Note • The cassette paper information registration screen is displayed after inserting the cassette 2. Register the cassette paper information according to the paper you loaded in the cassette 2. • If you want to cancel printing, press the machine's Stop button.
1874 Cause The cassette 1 and the cassette 2 are not inserted. Action Insert the both cassettes. Note • The cassette paper information registration screen is displayed after inserting the cassettes. Register the cassette paper information according to the paper you loaded in the cassette 1 and the cassette 2. • If you want to cancel printing, press the machine's Stop button.
1890 Cause The protective material for the print head holder or the tape may remain attached to the holder. Action Open the front cover, then confirm that the protective material or the tape does not remain attached to the print head holder. If you find the protective material or the tape remains attached, remove it, then close the front cover. If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center.
2001 Cause The device incompatible with the machine is connected. Action Check the device connected to the USB flash drive port. Printing photos directly is possible with a USB flash drive.
2002 Cause An unsupported USB hub is connected. Action If a USB flash drive is connected to the machine through the USB hub, disconnect the hub from the machine. Connect a USB flash drive directly to the machine.
2111 Cause The paper settings for printing or copying are different from the cassette paper information registered to the machine.
Select what to do as necessary. Note • Depending on the setting, the choices below may not be displayed. Print with paper in cass. settings Select if you want to print on the paper loaded in the cassette 1 without changing the paper settings. For example, when the paper setting for printing or copying is B5 and the cassette paper information registered to the machine is A4, the machine starts printing or copying with B5 on the paper loaded in the cassette 1.
Note • You can disable the message which prevents misprinting. When you disable the message, the machine starts printing or copying even though the paper settings for printing or copying and the cassette paper information registered to the machine are different.
2112 Cause The paper settings for printing or copying are different from the cassette paper information registered to the machine.
Select what to do as necessary. Note • Depending on the setting, the choices below may not be displayed. Print with paper in cass. settings Select if you want to print on the paper loaded in the cassette 2 without changing the paper settings. For example, when the paper setting for printing or copying is A4 and the cassette paper information registered to the machine is Legal, the machine starts printing or copying with A4 on the paper loaded in the cassette 2.
Note • You can disable the message which prevents misprinting. When you disable the message, the machine starts printing or copying even though the paper settings for printing or copying and the cassette paper information registered to the machine are different.
2113 Cause The paper settings for printing or copying are different from the cassette paper information registered to the machine.
Select what to do as necessary. Note • Depending on the setting, the choices below may not be displayed. Print with paper in cass. settings Select if you want to print on the paper loaded in the cassette 1 and the cassette 2 without changing the paper settings. For example, when the paper setting for printing or copying is A4 and the cassette paper information registered to the machine is Legal, the machine starts printing or copying with A4 on the paper loaded in the cassette 1 and the cassette 2.
Note • You can disable the message which prevents misprinting. When you disable the message, the machine starts printing or copying even though the paper settings for printing or copying and the cassette paper information registered to the machine are different.
2121 Cause The paper settings of the cassette 1 is not complete. Action If the following screen is displayed, the paper settings of the cassette 1 is not complete. Tap Register on the touch screen of the machine to terminate the paper settings of the cassette 1.
2122 Cause The paper settings of the cassette 2 is not complete. Action If the following screen is displayed, the paper settings of the cassette 2 is not complete. Tap Register on the touch screen of the machine to terminate the paper settings of the cassette 2.
2500 Cause The cause of following may have occurred the failure of Automatic Print Head Alignment. • Print head nozzles are clogged. • The paper of size other than A4 or Letter is loaded in the cassette 1. • The paper output slot is exposed to strong light. Action Tap OK on the touch screen to dismiss the error, then take the actions described below. • Print the nozzle check pattern to check the status of the print head.
2700 Cause Possible causes include the following. • Some errors occurred while copying and a certain time passed. • Document is remained in the ADF. • Some errors occurred while scanning and the document is remained in the ADF. Action Take the corresponding actions below. • When you copy, tap OK on the touch screen to dismiss the error, and try to copy again. • When the document is remained in the ADF, tap OK on the touch screen to feed out the document.
2802 Cause No document in the ADF. Action Tap OK on the touch screen to resolve the error, then operate again after loading documents.
2803 Cause The document is too long or is jammed in the ADF. Action Tap OK on the touch screen to dismiss the error. Then make sure that the document you are loading meets the machine's requirements before redoing the operation. If the document is jammed, remove the jammed document following the procedure below. • If the original is jammed in the ADF: Remove the document following the procedure below. 1. If printing is in progress, press the Stop button. 2. Turn off the machine. 3.
When rescanning the document after clearing the error, rescan it from the first page. If you cannot remove the document or the document tears inside the machine, or if the document jam error continues after removing the document, contact the service center. Note • The document may not feed properly depending on the media type, or your environment, such as when the temperature and humidity are either too high or too low.
2805 Cause The document cover is open. Action Close the document cover, then tap OK on the touch screen of the machine.
4100 Cause The specified data cannot be printed. Action When you print the contents on CREATIVE PARK PREMIUM, confirm the message on the computer screen, make sure that genuine Canon ink tanks are installed properly for all colors, then start printing again.
4103 Cause Cannot perform printing with the current print settings. Action Press the machine's Stop button to cancel printing. Then change the print settings and print again.
4104 Cause The paper size or the media type that cannot be fed from the cassette 2 is specified. Action Press the machine's Stop button to cancel printing. Specify the paper size setting to A4, Letter, or Legal and specify the media type setting to Plain Paper. Then print again. Note • If you will not change the paper size setting or the media type setting, select the cassette 1 as the paper source. If this is the case, register the cassette 1 paper information properly.
5011 Cause Printer error has occurred. Action Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply. Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on. If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center. Important • If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
5012 Cause Printer error has occurred. Action Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply. Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on. If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center. Important • If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
5040 Cause Printer error has occurred. Action Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply. Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on. If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center. Important • If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
5050 Cause Printer error has occurred. Action Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply. Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on. If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center. Important • If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
5051 Cause Printer error has occurred. Action Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply. Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on. If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center. Important • If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
5100 Cause Printer error has occurred. Action Cancel printing and turn off the machine. Then confirm the following. • Confirm that there are no materials (e.g. the protective material or jammed paper) that is preventing the print head holder from moving. If any, remove the materials. • Confirm that the ink tanks are installed properly. Push an ink tank until it clicks into place. After confirming the conditions above, turn on the machine again. If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center.
5102 Cause Printer error has occurred. Action Cancel printing and turn off the machine. Then confirm the following. • Confirm that there are no materials (e.g. the protective material or jammed paper) that is preventing the print head holder from moving. If any, remove the materials. • Confirm that the ink tanks are installed properly. Push an ink tank until it clicks into place. After confirming the conditions above, turn on the machine again. If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center.
5103 Cause Printer error has occurred. Action Cancel printing and turn off the machine. Then confirm the following. • Confirm that there are no materials (e.g. the protective material or jammed paper) that is preventing the print head holder from moving. If any, remove the materials. • Confirm that the ink tanks are installed properly. Push an ink tank until it clicks into place. After confirming the conditions above, turn on the machine again. If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center.
5104 Cause Printer error has occurred. Action Cancel printing and turn off the machine. Then confirm the following. • Confirm that there are no materials (e.g. the protective material or jammed paper) that is preventing the print head holder from moving. If any, remove the materials. • Confirm that the ink tanks are installed properly. Push an ink tank until it clicks into place. After confirming the conditions above, turn on the machine again. If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center.
5105 Cause Printer error has occurred. Action Cancel printing and turn off the machine. Then confirm the following. • Confirm that there are no materials (e.g. the protective material or jammed paper) that is preventing the print head holder from moving. If any, remove the materials. • Confirm that the ink tanks are installed properly. Push an ink tank until it clicks into place. After confirming the conditions above, turn on the machine again. If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center.
5200 Cause Printer error has occurred. Action Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply. Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on. If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center. Important • If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
5203 Cause Printer error has occurred. Action Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply. Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on. If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center. Important • If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
5204 Cause Printer error has occurred. Action Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply. Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on. If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center. Important • If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
5205 Cause Printer error has occurred. Action Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply. Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on. If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center. Important • If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
5206 Cause Printer error has occurred. Action Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply. Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on. If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center. Important • If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
5207 Cause Printer error has occurred. Action Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply. Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on. If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center. Important • If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
5208 Cause Printer error has occurred. Action Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply. Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on. If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center. Important • If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
5209 Cause Printer error has occurred. Action Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply. Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on. If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center. Important • If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
5400 Cause Printer error has occurred. Action Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply. Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on. If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center. Important • If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
5500 Cause Ink tank has not been properly recognized. Action Contact the service center.
5501 Cause Ink tank has not been properly recognized. Action Contact the service center.
5B00 Cause Printer error has occurred. Action Contact the service center.
5B01 Cause Printer error has occurred. Action Contact the service center.
5C01 Cause Printer error has occurred. Action Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply. Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on. If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center. Important • If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
6000 Cause Printer error has occurred. Action Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply. Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on. If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center. Important • If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
6500 Cause Printer error has occurred. Action Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply. Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on. If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center. Important • If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
6502 Cause Printer error has occurred. Action Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply. Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on. If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center. Important • If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
6700 Cause Printer error has occurred. Action Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply. Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on. If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center. Important • If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
6800 Cause Printer error has occurred. Action Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply. Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on. If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center. Important • If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
6801 Cause Printer error has occurred. Action Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply. Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on. If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center. Important • If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
6900 Cause Printer error has occurred. Action Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply. Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on. If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center. Important • If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
6901 Cause Printer error has occurred. Action Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply. Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on. If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center. Important • If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
6902 Cause Printer error has occurred. Action Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply. Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on. If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center. Important • If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
6910 Cause Printer error has occurred. Action Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply. Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on. If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center. Important • If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
6911 Cause Printer error has occurred. Action Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply. Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on. If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center. Important • If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
6920 Cause Printer error has occurred. Action Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply. Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on. If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center. Important • If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
6921 Cause Printer error has occurred. Action Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply. Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on. If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center. Important • If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
6930 Cause Printer error has occurred. Action Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply. Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on. If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center. Important • If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
6931 Cause Printer error has occurred. Action Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply. Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on. If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center. Important • If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
6932 Cause Printer error has occurred. Action Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply. Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on. If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center. Important • If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
6933 Cause Printer error has occurred. Action Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply. Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on. If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center. Important • If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
6936 Cause Printer error has occurred. Action Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply. Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on. If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center. Important • If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
6937 Cause Printer error has occurred. Action Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply. Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on. If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center. Important • If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
6938 Cause Printer error has occurred. Action Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply. Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on. If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center. Important • If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
6939 Cause Printer error has occurred. Action Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply. Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on. If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center. Important • If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
693A Cause Printer error has occurred. Action Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply. Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on. If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center. Important • If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
6940 Cause Printer error has occurred. Action Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply. Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on. If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center. Important • If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
6941 Cause Printer error has occurred. Action Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply. Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on. If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center. Important • If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
6942 Cause Printer error has occurred. Action Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply. Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on. If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center. Important • If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
6943 Cause Printer error has occurred. Action Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply. Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on. If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center. Important • If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
6944 Cause Printer error has occurred. Action Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply. Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on. If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center. Important • If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
6945 Cause Printer error has occurred. Action Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply. Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on. If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center. Important • If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
6946 Cause Printer error has occurred. Action Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply. Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on. If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center. Important • If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
7100 Cause Printer error has occurred. Action Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply. Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on. If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center. Important • If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
7200 Cause Printer error has occurred. Action Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply. Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on. If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center. Important • If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
7201 Cause Printer error has occurred. Action Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply. Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on. If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center. Important • If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
7202 Cause Printer error has occurred. Action Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply. Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on. If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center. Important • If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
7203 Cause Printer error has occurred. Action Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply. Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on. If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center. Important • If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
7204 Cause Printer error has occurred. Action Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply. Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on. If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center. Important • If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
7205 Cause Printer error has occurred. Action Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply. Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on. If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center. Important • If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
7300 Cause Printer error has occurred. Action Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply. Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on. If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center. Important • If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
9000 Cause Printer error has occurred. Action Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply. Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on. If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center. Important • If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
9500 Cause Printer error has occurred. Action Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply. Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on. If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center. Important • If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
B202 Cause An error requiring you to contact the service center has occurred. Action Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply. Contact the service center. Important • If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
B203 Cause An error requiring you to contact the service center has occurred. Action Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply. Contact the service center. Important • If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
B204 Cause An error requiring you to contact the service center has occurred. Action Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply. Contact the service center. Important • If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
B502 Cause Printer error has occurred. Action Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply. Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on. If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center. Important • If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
B503 Cause Printer error has occurred. Action Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply. Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on. If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center. Important • If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
B504 Cause Printer error has occurred. Action Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply. Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on. If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center. Important • If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
C000 Cause Printer error has occurred. Action Cancel printing and turn off the machine. Then confirm the following. • Confirm that there are no materials (e.g. the protective material or jammed paper) that is preventing the print head holder from moving. If any, remove the materials. • Confirm that the ink tanks are installed properly. Push an ink tank until it clicks into place. After confirming the conditions above, turn on the machine again. If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center.
